2008 Cadillac STS/STS-V Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using this Manual
{CAUTION:
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle to learn
about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures
and words work together to explain things.
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Index
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is
an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and
the page number where it can be found.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do Not do
this” or “Do Not let this
happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Lumbar
Front Seats
On vehicles with power
lumbar, the control is
located on the outboard
sides of the front seat(s).
Power Seats
The power seat controls
are located on the
outboard side of the seats.
To increase or decrease support, press and hold the
front or rear of the control.
To adjust the seat:
To raise or lower the position of the lumbar support,
press and hold the top or bottom of the control.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
horizontal control forward or rearward.
Vehicles with a memory function allow seat settings to
be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat, Mirrors
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the horizontal control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the horizontal control up or down.
• Use the vertical control to recline the seatback.
If your vehicle has the memory feature, you can program
and recall memory settings for seat positions. See
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Seats
Heated and Ventilated Seats
On vehicles with heated and ventilated front seats, the
buttons are located on the climate control panel.
On vehicles with heated
front seats, the buttons are
located on the climate
control panel.
z(Heated Seat and Seatback): Press for the heated
seat and seatback.
{(Ventilated Seat): Press for the ventilated seat.
The light bar in the climate control display shows
the setting; high, medium or low.
Press either button to start that feature at the highest
setting. Each time you press the button, the feature will
decrease one setting.
Keep pressing the button until the display lights turn off
to turn the feature off
z(Heated Seat and Seatback): Press the up or down
arrow once to turn on the heated seat at the highest
or lowest setting.
The heated or ventilated seats will automatically shut off
when the vehicle is turned off.
Press the up or down arrows a second time to raise or
lower the setting. Keep pressing the down arrow until
the indicator on the climate control display is off to
turn off the heated seat.
A light bar in the climate control display shows the setting:
high, medium, or low. The longest bar shows the high
range and the shortest bar shows the low range.
The heated seat will automatically shut off when the
vehicle is turned off.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
The front seats have
power reclining seatbacks.
Use the vertical power
seat control located on the
outboard side of the
seat to operate them.
• To recline the seatback, press the control toward
the rear of the vehicle.
• To raise the seatback, press the control toward the
front of the vehicle.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Do no have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the head restraint up
to raise it. To lower the
head restraint, press
the button, located on
the top of the seatback,
and push the head
Head Restraints
restraint down.
The front head restraints can also tilt forward or
rearward.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
z(Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this button to
turn the heated seat feature on. When you press
the button, the feature will turn on at the highest setting.
Each time you press the button, the feature will go
down one temperature setting. A light next to the button
will indicate the setting; 3 is the highest, 1 is the lowest.
To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button until
the indicator light goes off.
Rear Seats
Heated Seats
The heated rear seats will shut off automatically when
the ignition is turned off.
Rear Seat Pass-Through Door
Your vehicle has a pass-through door that provides
access to the trunk from the rear seats. See “Rear Seat
Your vehicle may have this feature. The buttons used to
control the heated rear seats are located on the rear
of the center console. The engine must be running
for the heated seat feature to work.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s) are
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
restrained properly too.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if
I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is
too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the
lap belt and apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give as much
protection this way.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not on the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt.
The belt force would then be applied right on
the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the
belt go back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in
this section.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
6. This safety belt has a feature that will reduce the
tension of the safety belt on the occupant’s shoulder
if the vehicle is on. To set this feature, gently pull on
the belt, or lean forward and then sit back. The belt
will retract and rest lightly against the occupant.
When the safety belt is unbuckled or when the
vehicle is turned off, the tension reducer will
deactivate. The belt should go back out of the way.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger.
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of
a moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash if
the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation
are met. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags,
safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety
belts in a side crash.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
To move it down, press
the release button (A) and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
You can move the height
adjuster up just by
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
pushing up on the shoulder
belt guide.
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pressing the release
button to make sure it has locked into position.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a
comfort guide to the safety belt:
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the
guide and clip inward and slide them in between
the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop
of the elastic cord exposed.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety Belt Extender
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you
go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else
use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit.
The extender has been designed for adults. Never use
it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective
is wearing them properly.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
{CAUTION:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries
in a crash.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child might slide under the lap belt.
The belt force would then be applied right on
the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if
a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never
leave children unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly
can strike other people, or can be thrown out of
the vehicle. In addition, young children should not use
the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need to use a
child restraint.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders.
Infants should always be secured in
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that is unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
appropriate infant restraints.
injuries. Young children should always be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{CAUTION:
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Because there are different
systems, it is important to refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint. Make
sure the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that restraint.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
{CAUTION:
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
for additional information.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your
child restraint to make sure it is compatible with
this vehicle.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and
its attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments
on the child restraint that are made for use with
the LATCH system.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Rear Seat
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
The top tether anchors are located under covers on the
rear seatback filler panel. Be sure to use an anchor
located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
additional information.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this
manual.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the
seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,
stowed position before folding the rear seat.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Secure any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child
restraint manufacturer.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt
assembly may cause damage to these parts.
Make sure when securing unused safety belts
behind the child restraint that there is no contact
between the child restraint LATCH attachment parts
and the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Open the top tether anchor cover to expose
the anchor.
2.3. If you have an adjustable headrest or head
restraint, raise the headrest or head restraint.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
under the head restraint
and in between the
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
head restraint posts.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether under the headrest
or head restraint and
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
in between the headrest or
head restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-36.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
page 1-37 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
tether anchor locations.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
more information on this, including important safety
information.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
for additional information.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
page 1-37 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
tether anchor locations.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the
page 3-61.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer/retailer.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
{CAUTION:
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can
be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you
would be if you were sitting on the edge of
your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help
keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags and roof-rail
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe crashes where something hits the side
of your vehicle. They are not designed to
inflate in frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or
roof-rail airbags.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where Are the Airbags?
{CAUTION:
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie down through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags
are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed threshold level. The threshold level can
vary with specific vehicle design.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag
causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy.
The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all
part of the airbag module.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are not
intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck. A roof-rail airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are
airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant seating positions.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by
the location and severity of the side impact.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for
some time after they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for several minutes.
For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in
the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma or
other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone
in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing problems
but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window
or a door. If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn
the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible on the overhead
console when you start your vehicle.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are
using remote start to start your vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check.
When the system check is complete, either the word
ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol
for off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
{CAUTION:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-6.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any
additional material from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers
and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully
upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and
check with your dealer/retailer.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for two to three minutes.
This will allow the system to detect that person and
then enable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and
“Child Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-60 for more on this, including
important safety information.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
page 1-65 for more information about modifications that
can affect how the system operates.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
page 7-15.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
operation of the passenger sensing system.
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing
system. This could either prevent proper deployment
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag system.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-60 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see What
dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or
frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used
at the time of the crash.
{CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any crash
may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keyless
access transmitter is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls or even make
the vehicle move. The windows will function
with the keyless access transmitter in the
vehicle and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave the keyless access transmitter in a
vehicle with children.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This key, located inside
the keyless access
transmitter, can be used
for all locks.
Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System with
for information on starting the vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lose your transmitter(s) and/or
key, it could be difficult to get into your vehicle.
You may even have to damage your vehicle
to get in. Be sure you have a spare transmitter
and/or key.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance.
Press the button (A) near
the bottom of the keyless
access transmitter to
remove the key. Never pull
the key without pressing
the button.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you ever notice a decrease in the keyless access
transmitter range, try doing one of the following:
Keyless Access System
Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System that
operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check to make sure that an electronic device such
as a cellular phone or lap top computer is not
causing interference.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle comes with
two transmitters.
Keyless Access System Operation
Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System that lets you
lock and unlock your vehicle’s doors, open the trunk
lid, remotely start the engine, and locate your vehicle, or
sound your vehicle’s alarm from a distance as much
as 30 feet (10 m) away.
Q(Lock): Press Qonce
to lock the doors. The lock
status light on the front
doors will turn on for
five seconds and the turn
signal indicators will flash.
The Keyless Access System also lets you lock and
unlock the vehicle’s doors and access the trunk without
removing the remote transmitter from your pocket,
purse, briefcase, etc. The system operates when the
transmitter is located within 3 feet (1 m) of the door or
trunk of your vehicle. See “Keyless Doors Unlock”
and “Keyless Ft (Front) Door Unlock” under Vehicle
If Qis pressed twice, the doors will lock, the status light
on the door will turn on for five seconds, the turn signal
indicators will flash twice, and the horn will sound once.
If the engine is off, the windows may be closed from
outside the vehicle using the lock button on the keyless
access transmitter. Press and hold the lock button for
more than two seconds to close any window. If any
window is unable to close completely, it will reverse and
the horn will chirp. See “Anti-Pinch Feature” under Power
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See “Lights Flash at Lock” and “Horn Chirps at Lock”
the feedback feature.
/(Remote Start): Press /to operate the remote
G(Trunk): Press and hold G for about
one second to open the trunk while the engine is
turned off or the shift lever is in PARK (P).
" (Unlock): Press " once to unlock the driver’s door.
The turn signal indicators will flash twice. Press " twice
within five seconds to unlock all the doors. If it is dark
enough outside, your interior lamps will come on.
L(Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
Lto locate your vehicle. The horn will chirp three times
and the turn signal lamps will flash three times. Press and
hold Lfor three seconds to sound the panic alarm.
The horn will chirp and the turn signal lamps will flash
for 30 seconds. Press and release Lagain to cancel the
panic alarm.
See “Lights Flash at Unlock” and “Ext. (Exterior) Lights at
change the feedback feature.
If your vehicle has the memory feature you can program
and recall memory settings when you press the unlock
button on the keyless access transmitter. See Memory
information.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each Keyless Access System is coded to allow only
transmitters programmed to your vehicle to work.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased and programmed through your dealer/retailer.
Your dealer/retailer can reprogram your vehicle so lost
or stolen transmitters no longer work with your vehicle.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters.
Two recognized transmitters are required for Canadian
owners.
To match a new transmitter to your vehicle when you
have a recognized transmitter:
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Have the recognized transmitter and the new,
unrecognized transmitter(s) with you.
6. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter into the
transmitter pocket with the transmitter buttons facing
the front of the vehicle. The transmitter pocket is
inside the center console storage area located
between the driver and front passenger seats.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder
located on the outside of the driver’s door.
4. Turn the key to the unlock position five times within
five seconds.
5. The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display
READY FOR FOB X, where X can be 2, 3 or 4.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Once the transmitter is programmed, a beep will
sound. The DIC will display READY FOR X,
The procedure will require three, ten minute cycles to
complete the matching process. Do the following:
where X can be 3 or 4, or MAX # FOBS LEARNED.
1. The vehicle must be off.
8. Remove the transmitter from the transmitter pocket
and press the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter two times.
The Canadian immobilizer standard requires Canadian
owners to see their dealer/retailer for matching new
transmitters when two recognized transmitters are not
available. United States owners are permitted to match a
new transmitter to their vehicle when a recognized
transmitter is not available.
2. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter into the
transmitter pocket with the transmitter buttons facing
the front of the vehicle. The transmitter pocket is
inside the center console storage area located
between the driver and front passenger seats.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder
located on the driver’s door.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Turn the key to the unlock position five times
within five seconds.
14. A beep will sound and the DIC will read READY
FOR FOB 1. At this time, all previously known
transmitters have been erased.
5. The DIC message will display OFF/ACC TO
LEARN.
15. Once the transmitter is recognized and
programmed, a beep will sound and the DIC will
display READY FOR FOB 2.
6. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch).
7. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will
count down to zero, one minute at a time.
16. Remove the keyless access transmitter and press
the unlock button twice to initialize it.
8. The DIC will display OFF/ACC TO LEARN again.
9. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch) again.
If you have additional transmitters to program, this
process can be repeated until four transmitters have
been programmed. The DIC will then display MAX #
FOBS LEARNED and will exit the programming mode.
10. The DIC will again read WAIT 10 MINUTES and
will count down to zero, one minute at a time.
When you are done programming transmitters, press
the unlock button on each keyless access transmitter
twice. After performing this process, transmitters
previously programmed will no longer work with your
vehicle and must be reprogrammed.
11. The DIC will display OFF/ACC TO LEARN again.
12. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch) again.
13. The DIC will again read WAIT 10 MINUTES and
will count down to zero, one minute at a time.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your keyless access
transmitter should last about three years.
The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the
normal range in any location. If you have to get close
to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it is
probably time to change the battery. The DIC may
display KEY FOB BATTERY LOW.
A weak battery may also cause the DIC to display NO
FOBS DETECTED when you try to start the vehicle.
If this happens, place the transmitter in the center
console storage area transmitter pocket with the buttons
facing to the front of the vehicle. Then, with the
vehicle in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), press the brake
pedal and the start button. See Starting the Engine
on page 2-29, for additional information about your
vehicle’s electronic keyless ignition with push button
start. Although this will start the vehicle, it is
To replace the battery:
1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the slot on
the side of the transmitter and separate the bottom
half from the top half.
recommended that you replace the transmitter battery
as soon as possible.
2. Carefully pull the battery out of the transmitter.
3. Put the new battery in the transmitter, positive (+)
side down. Use a battery type CR2032 or
equivalent.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure to put it
together so water will not get inside the transmitter.
5. Test the transmitter.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been
driven, repeat these steps, while the engine is still
running, to extend the engine running time by
Remote Vehicle Start
This feature allows you to start the engine from outside
the vehicle.
10 minutes. Remote start can be extended one time.
Before the remote vehicle start system can be operated,
it must be turned on through the vehicle personalization
system.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off
after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been
done. To manually shut off a remote start, do one of the
following:
You can also program the remote vehicle start system to
start up the vehicle’s automatic climate control system. If
this feature is turned on, the system monitors the outside
temperature and turns on the rear window defogger, front
window defogger, and heated or ventilated seats, if your
vehicle has them. See “Personal Settings Menu” under
• Aim the keyless access transmitter at the vehicle
and press the remote start button until the parking
lamps turn off.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
/(Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the remote keyless access transmitter at the
vehicle.
When you enter the vehicle during a remote start, press
the brake pedal and press the start button on the
keyless ignition switch to transition from remote start
operation to normal vehicle operation.
2. Press the transmitter’s lock button, release it, and
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s
remote start button for at least three seconds or until
the vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash. The vehicle’s
doors will be locked.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, laws may require a
person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
The remote start feature will not operate if any of the
following occur:
• The check engine light is displayed. See “Check
Engine Light” under Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-68.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
• The valet lockout switch is on.
• The keyless access transmitter is in the vehicle.
• The vehicle’s hood is open.
The remote start feature provides two separate starts,
each with 10 minutes of engine running. If you press the
lock button and then hold the remote start button on
the keyless access transmitter again for at least
three seconds before the first 10 minutes of engine
running time has expired, 10 minutes is added to the
remaining minutes. For example, if the remote start
is initiated again after five minutes of the engine
run time, 10 minutes is added and you now have
15 minutes with the engine running. Once two remote
starts or 20 minutes of the engine running have
been provided, the vehicle must be started using the
keyless access with pushbutton start feature, if the
engine needs to be restarted. See Starting the Engine
on page 2-29 for more information regarding the
keyless ignition.
• The vehicle personalization feature is not enabled.
• An unauthorized vehicle entry or a vehicle theft
was attempted.
Your keyless access transmitter, with the remote start
button, provides an increased range of operation.
However, the range may be less while the vehicle is
running. As a result, you may need to be closer to your
vehicle to turn it off than you were to turn it on.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Keyless Access
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
From the outside, press the lock or unlock button on
the keyless access transmitter. When you have
your transmitter with you, you may also unlock and
open the door by pulling the door handle. You do not
have to press the unlock button on the transmitter.
Entry occurs when the door handle is pulled and the
vehicle recognizes your transmitter. See Vehicle
program the keyless access feature.
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
From the inside, use the power door lock switches
page 2-14 for more information. The rear passenger
doors have manual door lock knobs located at the top of
the door panel near the window. Push down the knob
to lock the door. Pull up the knob to unlock the door.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the
front doors.
K(Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Q(Lock): Press to lock the doors.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These
prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from
the inside.
Your vehicle was programmed from the factory so that
when the doors are closed, the ignition is on and the shift
lever is moved out of PARK (P), all the doors will lock.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door. The rear doors
must be open to access
them. The label showing
lock and unlock positions is
located near the lock.
The front doors can still be opened from the inside while
the doors are locked. If a rear passenger needs to
exit the vehicle, have that person use the manual knob
or use the power door lock switch on either front
door. When the door is closed again, it will not lock
automatically. Use the manual knob or the power door
lock switch to lock the door.
The doors were also programmed from the factory to
unlock every time the shift lever is moved back into
PARK (P).
The power door locks can be programmed through the
radio display. The radio display allows you to choose
various lock and unlock settings. For more information on
Lock Label shown
To set the locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
Trunk
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the power
door lock switch, or the rear door manual lock.
{CAUTION:
2. Open the door from the outside.
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
Lockout Protection
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
Your vehicle can be programmed to sound the horn
three times and unlock the driver’s door when all doors
are closed and there is a keyless access transmitter
inside the interior of the vehicle. When the driver’s door
is reopened, the key in reminder chime will sound
continuously. The vehicle will remain locked only when
at least one transmitter has been removed from the
vehicle and both doors are closed. See Vehicle
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trunk Lid Release
There are three ways to open the trunk lid.
• V(Trunk Lid Release): Press this button located
on the driver’s door. The vehicle must be in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and the valet mode
turned off. To disable valet mode, see Valet Lockout
• Press the trunk lid release button on the keyless
access transmitter. See Keyless Access System
in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and the valet mode
turned off.
• Squeeze the trunk release button located on the
rear of the trunk lid above the license plate, as
long as you have your keyless access transmitter
with you. Entry occurs when the button is being
pressed and the vehicle recognizes the transmitter.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) and the valet
mode turned off.
If your vehicle has lost battery power, you can still
access the trunk by unlocking and lowering the rear seat
pass-through door and pulling the emergency trunk
release handle.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seat Pass-Through Door
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
To open the door:
1. Pull the rear seat armrest down.
2. If the door is locked, insert the key into the lock and
turn it counterclockwise.
3. Press the button above the lock and lower the door.
To open the trunk lid, pull the emergency trunk release
handle located in the trunk on the other side of the
door opening. See “Emergency Trunk Release Handle”
following.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release handle
located inside the trunk near the back of the rear
seats. This handle will glow following exposure to light.
Pull down the release handle to open the trunk from
the inside of the vehicle.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome from extreme heat in
warm or hot weather and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
The power window switches are located on the armrest
near each window. Press the front of the switch
to the first position to open the window to the desired
level. Lift up the front of the switch to the first position
to close the window.
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP) that
allows you to use the power windows once the engine
has been turned off. For more information, see Retained
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down/Up Window
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when
the express-up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also
cause the window to auto-reverse. The window will
return to normal operation once the obstruction
or condition is removed.
Any window can be lowered or raised all the way
without holding the switch.
Press the front of the window switch to the second
position and release to activate the express-down
feature. To stop the window, briefly pull up the switch.
Lift the front of the switch briefly to activate the
express-up feature. To stop the window, briefly press
the switch.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
Programming the Power Windows
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, each window must be
reprogrammed for the express-up feature to work.
{CAUTION:
If express override is activated, the window
will not reverse automatically. You or others
could be injured and the window could be
damaged. Before you use express override,
make sure that all people and obstructions are
clear of the window path.
To program each window:
1. With the ignition on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or
while RAP is active, close all doors.
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
window has fully opened.
3. Continue holding the switch for approximately
two seconds.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window switch
all the way up in the express position. The window will
rise for as long as the switch is held. Once the switch is
released, the express mode is re-activated.
4. Pull up the power window switch until the window
is fully closed.
Repeat the process for all windows.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Window Lockout
Theft-Deterrent Systems
o (Window Lockout): Press to disable the rear
window controls. The light on the button illuminates,
indicating that the feature is in use. The rear windows
can still be raised or lowered using the driver’s window
switches. To restore power to the rear windows, press the
button again. The light on the button will go out.
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Theft-Deterrent System
The front passenger window can be programmed to be
disabled using the window lockout button. See Vehicle
Your vehicle has a theft-deterrent alarm system.
The security light is
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
Secure Car Feature
The windows can be closed by pressing the lock button
on the keyless access transmitter. See Keyless Access
If any window is unable to close completely, it reverses
and the horn chirps. See “Anti-Pinch Feature” previously.
The engine must be off to operate this feature.
If the ignition is off and a door is open, the security light
will flash, reminding you to arm the theft-deterrent
system.
Sun Visors
Swing down the visor or detach it from the center mount
and move to the side to block out glare. The visors also
have side-to-side slide capability for greater coverage.
Pull the visor down and lift the cover. Move the slide
switch up or down to brighten or dim the lamp.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To arm the system:
• Passive Arming, if activated through the vehicle
personalization feature, will arm the system
• Press the lock button on the keyless access
transmitter. If the door is closed when the lock
button is pressed, the security light will stay
illuminated for 30 seconds. After the security light
goes off, the theft-deterrent system is armed.
Pressing the lock button twice will arm the system
immediately.
automatically after you close the door and take at
least one keyless access transmitter with you.
The security light will turn on. After 60 seconds the
light should turn off. The theft-deterrent system is
If a door, hood, or the trunk is opened without the
keyless access transmitter, the horn will sound for
30 seconds and the lamps will flash for two minutes.
The vehicle cannot be started without a keyless access
transmitter.
If the vehicle is locked using the keyless access
transmitter and the trunk lid, hood or a door is open
or not closed completely, the security light will flash
for 60 seconds and then turn off. At this time, the
theft-deterrent system is armed but the alarm will not
sound if the trunk lid, hood or door that was not
closed completely is tampered with or opened.
The alarm will sound for the trunk lid, hood or a door
that was completely closed at the time the vehicle
was locked using the keyless access transmitter.
The Theft-Deterrent system will not arm if:
• The key is used to turn the key cylinder to the
lock position.
• The driver’s door is locked using the power door
lock switch after the doors are closed.
• Open the door. Lock the door with the power door
lock switch or lock button on the keyless access
transmitter. The security light should flash. Close the
door. The security light will stop flashing and stay on.
After 30 seconds the light should turn off, the
theft-deterrent system is armed.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is locked using the keyless access
transmitter and the trunk lid, hood or a door is open or
not closed completely, the security light will flash for
60 seconds and then turn off. At this time, the
theft-deterrent system is armed but the alarm will not
sound if the trunk lid, hood or door that was not closed
completely is tampered with or opened. The alarm
will sound for the trunk lid, hood or a door that was
completely closed at the time the vehicle was locked
using the keyless access transmitter.
Testing the Alarm
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window,
then get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open,
lock the vehicle using the power door lock switch
or the keyless access transmitter and close the
door. Wait about 30 seconds until the security light
goes off.
3. Reach in and open the door using the inside door
handle. The horn will sound and the exterior lamps
will flash.
The vehicle can be programmed to automatically unlock
the doors and disarm the theft-deterrent system when
you approach the vehicle and the keyless access
transmitter is with you. See Vehicle Personalization
on page 2-60.
You can turn off the alarm by pressing the unlock button
on the keyless access transmitter or by starting the car.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to
see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown.
page 5-117. If the fuse does not need to be replaced,
you may need to have your vehicle serviced.
Pressing the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter or using the key to unlock the driver’s door
disarms the theft-deterrent system. Unlocking a door any
other way while the system is armed will activate the
alarm.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the
Theft-Deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R(On): PressRto turn the lockout feature on.
When the lockout feature is turned on, the trunk cannot
be unlocked with the keyless access transmitter or
the trunk release button located on the driver’s door.
If the valet lockout feature is on it will also disable
the remote start feature and the Universal Home
Remote transmitter, if equipped.
Valet Lockout Switch
The valet lockout switch
is located inside the
glove box.
Locking the glove box with your key will also help to
secure your vehicle.
9(Off): Press 9to turn the lockout feature off.
When the lockout feature is off, you can open the trunk
using either the keyless access transmitter or the
trunk release button located on the driver’s door.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Immobilizer
Immobilizer Operation
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Your vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the ignition
mode transitions to off.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The immobilization system is disarmed when the ignition
mode transitions to OFF/ACCESSORY or START and
a valid transmitter is found in the vehicle.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
The system has one or more keyless access
transmitters that are matched to an immobilizer control
unit in your vehicle. Only a correctly matched keyless
access transmitter will start the vehicle. If the keyless
access transmitter is ever damaged, you may not
be able to start your vehicle.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the security light comes on, there may be
a problem with your immobilizer system. Press
the START button again.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle does not start and the keyless access
transmitter appears to be undamaged, try another
keyless access transmitter. Or, you may try placing the
transmitter in the transmitter pocket. See “NO FOBS
DETECTED” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-80 for additional information. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and
does not start with the other transmitter, your vehicle
needs service. If the engine does start, the first
transmitter may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer
who can service the theft-deterrent system and have
a new keyless access transmitter programmed to
the vehicle.
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
It is possible for the immobilizer system to learn new
or replacement keyless access transmitters. Up to
4 keyless access transmitters can be programmed for
the vehicle. To program additional transmitters, see
“Matching transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under Keyless
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9/Acc. (OFF/ACCESSORY): When this button is
pressed, the engine will turn off even if the shifter is not
in PARK (P). If the shifter is in PARK (P), the ignition
mode will change to RAP, if all doors are closed.
The ignition mode will change to off, if a front door is
page 2-29 for more information. If the shifter is not in
PARK (P), the ignition mode will change to Acc.
Ignition Positions
Your vehicle has an
electronic keyless ignition
with pushbutton start.
When the engine is off, press this button to place the
vehicle in accessory mode. ACCESSORY ACTIVE
will display on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
This mode allows you to use things like the radio and
the windshield wipers while the engine is off. Use
accessory mode if you must have your vehicle in motion
while the engine is off, for example, if your vehicle is
being towed. If the door is open while in accessory
mode, the key in reminder chime will sound
continuously.
To shift out of PARK (P), the vehicle must be running or
in ACCESSORY mode and the regular brake pedal
must be applied.
/(START): Press this button while your foot is on the
brake to start the engine. The shifter must be in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to start the engine and the
keyless access transmitter must be in the vehicle for
the ignition to work.
If the push-button start is not working, your vehicle
may be near a strong radio antenna signal causing
interference to the keyless access system. See
information.
After being in Acc. for about 20 minutes, the vehicle will
automatically enter RAP or will turn off, depending on
if the doors are opened or closed.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cell phone chargers can interfere with the operation of
the Keyless Access System. Battery chargers should
not be plugged in when starting or turning off the engine.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
20 minutes after the engine is turned off:
To start your vehicle, do the following:
• Audio System
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot on the brake pedal, press the
START button located on the instrument panel.
• Audio Steering Wheel Controls
• Power Windows
Power to these accessories will work up to 20 minutes
or until one of the front doors is opened. For an
additional 20 minutes of operation, close all the doors
and press Acc. to place the vehicle in accessory mode.
Press the button again to return to RAP.
If there is not a keyless access transmitter in
the vehicle or if there is something causing
interference with it, the DIC will display NO FOBS
DETECTED. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-80 for more information.
2. When the engine begins cranking, let go of the
button and the engine cranks automatically until
it starts. If the battery in the keyless access
transmitter is weak, the DIC displays KEY FOB
BATTERY LOW. You can still drive the vehicle.
Starting the Engine
To place the transmission in the proper gear:
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
To restart when you are already moving, use
NEUTRAL (N).
See “Battery Replacement” under Keyless Access
If the fob battery is dead, you need to insert the
fob into the fob slot to enable engine starting.
See “No Fobs Detected” under DIC Warnings and
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
The keyless access transmitter must be inside the
vehicle for the ignition to work.
3. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently until
the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. If the engine does not start and no DIC message is
displayed, wait 15 seconds before trying again to let
the cranking motor cool down.
To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already running.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor while cranking for up to 15 seconds maximum.
Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the accelerator. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
Stopping Your Engine
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) and press the Acc.
button located on the instrument panel. If the shifter is
not in PARK (P), the engine shuts off and the vehicle
goes into the Accessory Mode. The DIC displays SHIFT
TO PARK. Once the shifter is moved to PARK (P),
the vehicle turns off.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by pressing the START button immediately
after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at
least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down.
The DIC displays NO FOB, OFF OR RUN?, if the
keyless access transmitter is not detected inside the
vehicle when it is turned off.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. Once cranking has
been initiated, the engine continues cranking for a
few seconds or until the vehicle starts. If the engine
does not start, cranking automatically stops after
15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage.
more information.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{CAUTION:
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the
plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C).
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
5. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
For the 3.6L V6 and 4.4L V8 engine, the cord is
located in the front of the engine compartment,
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
For the 4.6L V8 engine, the cord is located in the
engine compartment on the driver’s side of the
vehicle near the inner fender and above the strut.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
3. You must remove the plastic cap to access the plug.
4. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
CAUTION: (Continued)
There are several different
positions for the shift lever.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start the engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
apply your regular brakes first and then press the
shift lever button before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the vehicle is running. If you cannot shift out
of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever and push
the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you
maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever
button and move the shift lever into another gear.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy for your vehicle. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
At low vehicle speeds, you can also use REVERSE (R)
to rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your transmission.
on page 4-25 for additional information.
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. You can also
use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
The transmission will shift down to a lower gear and
have more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While driving in sport mode, the transmission
may remain in a gear longer than it would in
normal driving mode based on braking, throttle
input, and vehicle lateral acceleration.
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Notice: If you drive your vehicle at high RPMs
without upshifting while using Driver Shift
Control (DSC), you could damage your vehicle.
Always upshift when necessary while using DSC.
2. Press the shift lever forward to upshift or rearward
to downshift.
Your automatic transmission has a Driver Shift
Control (DSC) feature that allows you to change
gears similar to a manual transmission.
To use the DSC feature:
The DIC will show the
driver’s selection when
moving the shift lever
forward or rearward.
Center (DIC) on page 3-74
for more information on
the DIC.
1. Slide the shift lever over from DRIVE (D) to the
right into the DSC area.
When the transmission is
in DSC mode the sport
symbol in the Driver
Information Center (DIC)
will come on.
Wde, the number displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) indicates the
gear that the transmission is in. When starting the
vehicle from a stopped condition, only First (1) and
Second (2) gear may be used.
While using the DSC feature the vehicle will have firmer
shifting and increased performance. You can use this
for sport driving or when climbing/descending hills
to stay in gear longer or to down shift for more power or
engine braking.
If you do not move the shift lever forward or
rearward, the vehicle will be in sport mode.
When you are in the sport mode the
vehicle will still shift automatically.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears
appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmission will
not automatically shift to the next higher gear if the
engine RPM is too high.
This vehicle has a push-to-release parking brake pedal.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot and push the parking
brake pedal down with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on
the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it
does not, you need to have your vehicle serviced.
more information.
If shifting is prevented for any reason, the selected gear
will flash multiple times, indicating that the transmission
has not shifted gears.
The transmission will allow you to shift to the gear
selected and will automatically downshift when
the vehicle comes to a stop. This will allow for more
power during take-off and passing.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down with your right foot and push the parking brake
pedal with your left foot. When you lift your left foot,
the parking brake releases.
Parking Brake
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
The parking brake pedal
is located on the lower
portion of the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on and the vehicle begins to move.
To stop the chime, fully release the parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill,
more information.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal
down, set the parking brake with your left foot. See
Shifting Into PARK (P)
4. Turn the ignition off.
{CAUTION:
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer (Vehicles
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
To shift into PARK (P), use the following steps:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and
your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the
button on the front of the shift lever while pushing
the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
Release the button.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After you have moved the shift lever into PARK (P),
hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can
move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first
pushing the button on the shift lever. If you can, it means
that the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
Prevent shifting out of PARK (P) unless the vehicle
is running or in Accessory mode and the regular brake
pedal is applied.
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting
Into PARK (P)” listed previously.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the
shift lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
the parking brake after you move the shift
lever to PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a trailer,
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Intellibeam™ and OnStar®
Your vehicle may have an Intellibeam™ inside rearview
mirror with OnStar® controls. For more information
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror that also contains OnStar® controls. For more
page 2-48.
Mirror Operation
To turn on and enable Intellibeam™, press and release
the Intellibeam™ button on the inside rear view
mirror. If the vehicle has the IntelliBeam™ Intelligent
High-Beam Headlamp Control System, the on/off button
can also be used to turn off or reset this system.
See “IntelliBeam™ Intelligent High-Beam Headlamp
O(On/Off): Press and hold the button, located on the
lower left side of the mirror face, for about three seconds
to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off.
The indicator light will illuminate when this feature is
active. The automatic dimming feature is active each time
the vehicle is started.
Cleaning the Mirror
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
AUTO/ ( (On/Off): Press and hold the AUTO button
located on the lower center of the mirror for about
three seconds to turn automatic dimming on.
The indicator light will illuminate when this feature is
active. The automatic dimming feature is active each
time the vehicle is started. Press and hold the ( (off)
button located next to the AUTO button for about three
seconds to turn the automatic dimming feature off.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with a compass display. The mirror also
contains OnStar® controls. For more information see
When the ignition and the compass feature are on,
the compass will show two character boxes for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the compass heading.
The mirror includes an eight-point compass display in
the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on,
the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle
is driven.
Compass Calibration
If after two seconds, the display does not show a
compass heading (for example, N for North), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic
antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder or a similar
magnetic item. If the letter C should ever appear in the
compass window, the compass may need calibration.
Mirror Operation
O(On/Off): Press and hold the button, located on
the lower left side of the mirror face, for about
three seconds to turn the automatic dimming feature on
or off. The indicator light will illuminate when this
feature is active. The automatic dimming feature is
active each time the vehicle is started.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads
a direction.
The compass can be placed in calibration mode
manually by pressing and holding the on/off button
until a C is shown in the compass display.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Variance
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you live outside
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as during
a long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust for compass variance. Compass variance is
the difference between earth’s magnetic north and true
geographic north. If not adjusted to account for
compass variance, your compass could give false
readings.
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find the current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears in the display.
3. Once the zone number appears in the display,
press the on/off button quickly until the correct
zone number appears in the display. Stop pressing
the button and the mirror will return to normal
operation. If C appears in the compass window,
the compass may need calibration. See Compass
Calibration listed previously.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Return the selector switch to the center position when
finished adjusting. This will prevent unwanted mirror
movement in case the control pad is accidentally
bumped while driving.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
The preferred mirror positions can be stored with the
memory option. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Outside Power Heated Mirrors
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent
damage when going through car washes or confined
spaces. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle.
To return the mirror to its original position, push outward.
Be sure to return both mirrors to their original unfolded
position before driving.
The power mirror control
is on the driver’s door
armrest and controls
the driver’s side and
passenger’s side mirrors.
When the rear window defogger is turned on, both
outside rear view mirrors are heated to help clear them
of ice, snow, or condensation. See “Rear Window
page 3-48.
Move the selector switch left or right to choose the
driver’s side or passenger’s side mirror. Use the arrows
located on the control pad to adjust the position of
each mirror. Adjust each mirror so you can see the side
of your vehicle and the area behind your vehicle.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
Outside Parallel Park Assist Mirror
The driver’s side mirror will adjust for the glare of
headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by the
on and off settings on the automatic dimming rearview
mirror.
This feature assists the driver by improving rear obstacle
detection and is useful in viewing the curb when
parallel parking.
Press the left or right mirror symbol on the selector
control to choose the driver or passenger outside mirror.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R), the
selected mirror will tilt to a factory programmed position.
If further mirror adjustment is needed press the arrows
located on the outside mirror control pad. If the
outside mirror selector switch is in the middle position,
neither outside mirror will move.
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R), and a
five-second delay has occurred, the mirror will return
to its original position. The delay prevents movement of
the mirror if multiple gear transitions REVERSE (R)
to DRIVE (D) to REVERSE (R) occur during a parallel
parking maneuver.
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
The passenger side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s
surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver’s
seat. This mirror does not have a dimming feature.
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, see “Side Blind Zone Alert” in the Index of your
vehicle’s navigation system manual.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Object Detection Systems
CAUTION: (Continued)
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA)
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, it helps you park easier and avoid other
vehicles while in REVERSE (R). It operates at speeds
less than 3 mph (5 km/h). It can determine how close
objects are to the rear bumper, up to 5 feet (1.5 m)
behind your vehicle. The distance sensors are located
on the rear bumper.
If you do not use proper care before and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death
could occur. Even with URPA, always check
behind your vehicle before backing up. While
backing, be sure to look for objects and check
your vehicle’s mirrors.
The display is located in
the dome lamp and can be
seen by looking over
your right shoulder.
{CAUTION:
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision.
It cannot detect:
• objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are
too close or far from the vehicle
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance
and system information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following describes what will occur with the URPA
display as you get closer to a detected object:
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever
is moved into REVERSE (R). The rear display will
then briefly illuminate to let you know the system
is working.
Description
amber light
English
5 ft
Metric
1.5 m
1.0 m
URPA operates only at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
If you are above this speed, the red light on the rear
display will flash.
amber/amber lights
40 in
amber/amber/red
20 in
1 ft
0.5 m
0.3 m
lights/continuous beep
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below trunk level.
Objects must also be within 5 feet (1.5 m) from your
rear bumper. This distance may be less during warmer
or humid weather.
amber/amber/red lights
flashing and
continuous beep
A single beep will sound the first time an object is
detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m)
away. Repeated beeping will occur when you are
closer than 20 inches (0.5 m) from the object.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
Side Blind Zone Alert
Your vehicle may have a Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system. The SBZA system is an aid that may help
you avoid lane change crashes with vehicles in your side
blind spots (zones). Read the entire section before
using the system. See “Side Blind Zone Alert” in
the Index of the navigation manual.
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean, a red URPA
display light may illuminate when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). Keep your rear bumper free of mud,
dirt, snow, ice and slush. For cleaning instructions,
• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle
or an object was hanging out of your trunk during
your last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate.
Once the attached object is removed, URPA
will return to normal operation.
Lane Departure Warning
Your vehicle may have a Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) system. The LDW system does not steer the
vehicle and is only an aid to help you stay in your driving
lane. Read the entire section before using the system.
See “Lane Departure Warning” in the Index of the
navigation manual.
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at
least 15 mph (25 km/h), take your vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
A complete OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar
Terms and Conditions are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar Subscriber glove box literature. For more
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or
TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button to
speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be sent to your location.
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock
your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press
the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside
Service for you.
OnStar Services
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,
or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for
one year from the date of purchase. You can extend this
plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the Directions
& Connections Plan. For more information, press the
OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Some OnStar
services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be available until
you register with OnStar.
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your
OnStar service at any time by contacting OnStar.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also
be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S.
or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with an
OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Virtual Advisor
How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and
stock quotes. By pressing the phone button and giving
a few simple voice commands, you can browse
through the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s
Guide for more information (Only available in the
continental U.S.).
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability of
recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an OnStar
Call Center at the time of an OnStar button press,
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN
system deploys. The vehicle information usually includes
your GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the accident that your
vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction from
which your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual
Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your
vehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we
can provide you with location-based services.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
more information.
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar
service also cannot work unless you are in a place
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for
that area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services
are available everywhere, particularly in remote
or enclosed areas, or at all times.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button for
a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR” to
activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Location information about your vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
Universal Home Remote
System
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of your
vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network congestion.
Universal Home Remote System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Your Responsibility
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStar
advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red,
this means that your system is not functioning properly
and should be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired. You can always press the
OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment
is active.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person available to
assist you in programming the transmitter.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future
programming. You only need the original remote control
transmitter for Fixed Code programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale or lease termination
of the vehicle, the programmed buttons should be
erased for security purposes. See “Erasing Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
When programming a garage door, it is advised to park
outside of the garage. Be sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door or security device
you are programming.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or
go to www.learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions,
the device will time out and you will have to repeat the
procedure.
To program up to three devices:
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this
button. After you press this button, you will have
30 seconds to complete the following steps.
3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that you would
like to use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light, above the
selected button, should slowly blink. You may
need to hold the button from five to 20 seconds.
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
To program up to three devices:
5. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-5, choosing
a different function button in Step 3 than what you
used for the garage door opener.
If these instructions do not work, you probably have
a Fixed Code garage door opener. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728
or go to www.learcar2u.com.
1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage door
opener, remove the battery cover on your hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer
of your garage door opener motor. If you see a row
of dip switches similar to the graphic above, you
have a Fixed Code garage door opener. If you
do not see a row of dip switches, return to the
previous section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are
Fixed Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions,
the device will time out and you will have to repeat the
procedure.
Your hand held transmitter may have between
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of
transmitter.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
may also have a row of dip switches that can be
used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if
the dip switch settings are different, use the
dip switch settings on the motor head unit to
program your Universal Home Remote. The motor
head dip switch settings can also be used when
you do not have the original hand held transmitter.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
The panel of switches may not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should be
similar.
The switch positions on your hand-held transmitter
may be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position may be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position may be labeled as
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
“Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position may be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position,
write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position,
write “Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings that you wrote down in
Step 2 will now become the button strokes you
enter into the Universal Home Remote in
Step 4. Be sure to enter the switch settings that
you wrote down in Step 2, in order from left
to right, into the Universal Home Remote,
when completing Step 4.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home
Remote into programming mode.
two and one-half minutes to complete Step 4.
Now press one button on the Universal Home
Remote for each switch setting as follows:
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
You can reprogram any of the three buttons by repeating
the instructions.
6. Press and hold the button you would like to use to
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected button
should slowly blink. You may need to hold the
button from five to 55 seconds.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
You should erase the programmed buttons when you
sell or terminate your lease.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
8. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same
time for approximately 20 seconds, until the
indicator lights, located directly above the buttons,
begin to blink rapidly.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what you used for
the garage door opener.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of
a second. The indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage Areas
Sunroof
If your vehicle has a power
sunroof, the switches are
located on the overhead
console.
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle has two cupholders in the center
console area.
Center Console Storage
Your vehicle has a center console storage area located
between the front seats. It includes storage areas, and
accessory power outlet(s) on the rear of the console.
To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must be on or
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear of
the vehicle. Put small loads behind the net. The net
is not for heavier loads. Store them as far forward
as you can.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express Open: The express open feature will operate
from the closed or partially open position. To express
open the power sunroof, fully press the driver’s
side switch rearward once. To stop the sunroof glass
in a desired position other than to the express-open
position, press the switch again, in either direction, to
stop the movement. If the sunshade is in the closed
position, it will open with the sunroof, or it can be
opened manually.
Close: To close the power sunroof, operate the controls
according to one of the following:
• From the open position, press and hold the driver’s
side sunroof switch forward. The sunshade must be
closed manually.
• From the vent position, press and hold the
passenger’s side sunroof switch rearward.
Anti-Pinch: If an object is in the path of the sunroof
while it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the
object and stop the sunroof from closing at the point
of the obstruction. The sunroof will then return to
the full-open or vent position. To close the sunroof once
it has re-opened, refer to the two options previously
described under the “Close” feature instructions.
Vent Open: To open the power sunroof to the vent
position from the closed position, press and hold
the passenger’s side sunroof switch forward. The rear of
the sunroof panel will tilt upward to the full vent
position. The sunshade must be opened manually.
Express Close: The express close feature will operate
from the open or partially open position. To express
close the power sunroof, fully press the driver’s
side switch forward once. To stop the sunroof glass in a
desired position other than closed, press the switch
again in either direction. The sunshade must be closed
manually.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the base audio system, the following
information explains the vehicle personalization on
your vehicle.
Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization that allows you to
program certain features to a preferred setting for up to
two drivers. The back of the keyless access transmitters
are labelled 1 or 2. Additional keyless access transmitters
programmed to the vehicle, as 3 and/or 4, do not have
a number on the back and are not capable of being
personalized. The number of programmable features
varies depending upon which vehicle options are
purchased.
If your vehicle has the Navigation system, see
“Personalization” in the Index of the Navigation System
manual for information on vehicle personalization.
If your vehicle has the ability to program additional
personalization features, the driver’s preferences
are recalled by pressing any button on the keyless
access transmitter, 1 or 2, by selecting Driver 1 or 2 on
the radio display, or when a valid keyless access
transmitter is detected upon opening the driver’s door.
On all vehicles, features such as climate control settings,
radio and XM™ preset settings, exterior lighting at unlock
and remote lock unlock confirmation, and language have
already been programmed for your convenience. Your
vehicle also has an automatic door locking feature that is
always on. You cannot turn the automatic door locking
page 2-15.
If more than one valid keyless access transmitter is
detected upon opening the driver’s door, the driver
preferences for the lowest driver number will be recalled.
Certain features can be programmed not to recall until
the ignition is turned off.
The default settings for the personalization features
were set when your vehicle left the factory, but
may have changed from their default state since then.
Some vehicles have additional features that can be
programmed including the seat, steering column, and
outside rearview mirror position.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change feature preferences, use the following
procedure.
5. Press the tune/select knob to enter the SETUP menu.
6. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to PERSONAL
SETTINGS MENU, then press the tune/select knob
to turn the feature on. A check mark appears
after this selection when it is turned on and the
entire list of personalization features will appear.
Entering the Personal Settings Menu
To enter the feature programming mode:
1. Be sure the ignition is either on, in ACCESSORY,
or in RAP and place the transmission in PARK (P)
or make sure that the vehicle speed is less than
6 mph (9 km/h).
7. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to the feature
you want to change, then press the tune/select
knob to turn the feature on or off. If the feature is
turned on, a check mark will appear next to the
feature name.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
Some features have submenus that show
additional features that can be turned on or off.
After entering a submenu, turn the tune/select knob
and scroll to the feature you want to change,
then press the tune/select knob to turn the feature
on or off.
2. Press any button on the appropriate keyless
access transmitter to identify yourself as
Driver 1 or Driver 2.
Turn on the radio by pressing the
power/volume knob.
3. Press the CNFG radio button or the tune/select
knob located on the right side of the radio to
enter the radio’s main menu.
4. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to SETUP.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the tune/select knob to turn on the DRIVER
GREETING feature.
Personal Settings Menu Items
The PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU must be selected
with a check mark to program the personalization
features. If it is not selected, press the tune/select knob
until the check mark appears. If it is selected, the
entire list of features will be available to program.
You will see a cursor on the screen.
4. Turn the tune/select knob until you reach the first
letter you want; the letter will be highlighted.
There is a complete alphabet with both upper and
lower case letters and the numbers zero through
nine. Also included are spaces and other non-letter
characters such as the ampersand (&).
DRIVER GREETING
This feature allows you to type in a customized name or
greeting that will appear on the display whenever the
corresponding keyless access transmitter, 1 or 2, is used
or Driver 1 or Driver 2 is selected on the radio display.
5. Press the tune/select knob once to select the letter.
The letter will then appear on the display and the
cursor will advance to the next letter.
If you make a mistake, press the F5 button, located
on the radio, repeatedly to cycle back through all
of the characters until you reach the character you
wish to change. Then turn the tune/select knob
until the letter you want is highlighted and press the
tune/select knob to select the new letter.
If a customized name or greeting is not programmed, the
system will show Driver 1 or Driver 2 to correspond
with the numbers on the back of the keyless access
transmitters. In this case, the customized driver greeting
feature is factory shipped as off.
To turn the driver greeting feature on and to program a
customized name or greeting:
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until the name or greeting
you want is complete. You can program up to
16 characters.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER GREETING
is highlighted.
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The name or greeting you programmed is now set.
You can either exit the programming mode by following
the instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle by pressing the
F6 (BACK) button, located on the radio, to return to the
PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU. You will now see a
check mark next to the driver greeting menu item,
which means that the driver greeting feature is on and a
customized driver greeting is being used.
KEY FOB REMINDER
This feature chirps the horn three times when the
driver’s door is closed and there is a keyless access
transmitter left inside of the vehicle. This will only occur
when the vehicle is off.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON (default)
To turn off the customized driver greeting, and go back
to displaying either Driver 1 or Driver 2:
Mode 2: OFF
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER GREETING
is highlighted.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEY FOB
REMINDER is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to turn on the DRIVER
GREETING feature. The check mark will be cleared
and the customized driver greeting is off.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The only way to correct a customized driver greeting
once you have exited the screen to spell the name, is to
turn the driver greeting feature off, and then turn it
back on.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLIMATE CONTROL: The climate control system will
engage when the vehicle is started using the remote
start feature. It will be at the same climate control setting
that was last used by the driver using that keyless
entry transmitter.
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to choose
the features you would like to have activated when
you engage the remote start on your vehicle.
These features include the climate control system,
the rear defogger, and the seat temperature, if your
vehicle has this feature. Activating these features helps
provide a more comfortable vehicle upon entry. See
REAR WINDOW DEFOG: If this feature is active, the
rear defogger will engage when the vehicle is started
using the remote start feature.
SEAT TEMP (Temperature) CONTROL: If your vehicle
has this feature and this feature is active, the seats
will be heated or cooled when the vehicle is started
using the remote start feature.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON (default)
Mode 2: OFF
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle by pressing the F6 (BACK) button,
located on the radio, to return to the PERSONAL
SETTINGS MENU.
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until REMOTE START is
highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When REMOTE START is on, a check mark will appear
next to the feature name. You can then choose to
activate any or all of the following features by turning
the tune/select knob to highlight the feature, then
pressing the knob to turn it on.
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE RECALL MEMORY
START BUTTON RECALL
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on,
you can recall any previously programmed seat position
and mirror position when the unlock button on the
keyless access transmitter is pressed.
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on,
you can recall any previously programmed seat, mirror,
and steering column position when the start button
on the ignition is pressed.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF (default)
Mode 2: OFF (default)
The exception to the default is the recall seat to driver
position which is on.
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until START BUTTON
RECALL is highlighted.
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until REMOTE RECALL
MEMORY is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
If this feature is selected, REMOTE RECALL MEMORY
cannot be selected.
If this feature is selected, START BUTTON RECALL
cannot be selected.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO EXIT SEAT
AUTO EXIT COLUMN
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed exit position for
the driver’s seat when the vehicle is off, the shift lever is
in PARK (P), and the driver’s door is opened.
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed exit position for
the steering column when the vehicle is off, the shift
lever is in PARK (P), and the driver’s door is opened.
Programmable Modes
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF (default)
Mode 2: OFF (default)
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until AUTO EXIT SEAT is
highlighted.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until AUTO EXIT
COLUMN is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear in the box next to the feature name.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear in the box next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash when
the keyless access transmitter is used to unlock
the vehicle. All doors must be closed for this feature to
work, and the lamps will not flash if the parking
lamps or headlamps are on.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until LIGHTS FLASH AT
UNLOCK is highlighted.
If LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK is turned on and either
KEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCK or KEYLESS DOORS
UNLOCK is turned on, the exterior lamps will flash when
the doors are passively unlocked. See “KEYLESS
FT (Front) DOOR UNLOCK” and “KEYLESS DOORS
UNLOCK” later in this section for more information.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON (default)
Mode 2: OFF
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash once
when the keyless access transmitter is used to lock the
vehicle. All doors must be closed for this feature to
work, and the lamps will not flash if the parking lamps
or headlamps are on.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until LIGHTS FLASH AT
LOCK is highlighted.
If LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK is turned on and either
KEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCK or KEYLESS DOORS
UNLOCK is turned on, the exterior lamps will flash when
the doors are passively unlocked. See “KEYLESS FT
(Front) DOOR UNLOCK” and “KEYLESS DOORS
UNLOCK” later in this section for more information.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
You can select this feature by itself, or you can combine
it with Horn Chirps At Lock so that both the exterior
lamps flash and the horn chirps when you lock
your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON (default)
Mode 2: OFF
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXT. (Exterior) LIGHTS AT UNLOCK
HORN CHIRPS AT LOCK
This feature turns on the exterior lamps when the
keyless access transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle.
The lamps will remain on for about 20 seconds unless
a door is opened, the ignition is in ACCESSORY, on, or
START, or the keyless access transmitter is used to
lock the vehicle.
This feature sounds the horn once when the keyless
access transmitter is used to lock the vehicle. All doors
must be closed for this feature to work.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Programmable Modes
Mode 2: OFF (default)
Mode 1: ON (default)
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
Mode 2: OFF
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until HORN CHIRPS AT
LOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until EXT. LIGHTS AT
UNLOCK is highlighted.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To determine the mode to which the vehicle is
programmed or to program the vehicle to a
different mode:
TWILIGHT DELAY
This feature allows you to set the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on after you exit
the vehicle.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: 0:00 seconds (off)
Mode 2: 0:05 seconds (default)
Mode 3: 0:15 seconds
Mode 4: 0:30 seconds
Mode 5: 1:30 minutes
Mode 6: 2:00 minutes
Mode 7: 3:00 minutes
Mode 8: 4:00 minutes
2. Turn the tune/select knob until TWILIGHT DELAY
is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to scroll through the
available delay settings and set your selection.
If you choose Mode 1, the exterior lamps will not
illuminate when you exit the vehicle. Only one mode
can be selected at a time.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVER UNLOCK AT OFF
DOORS UNLOCK AT OFF
This feature allows the driver’s door to automatically
unlock when the ignition is turned off.
This feature allows all of the doors to automatically
unlock when the ignition is turned off.
Programmable Modes
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF (default)
Mode 2: OFF (default)
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER UNLOCK
AT OFF is highlighted.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DOORS UNLOCK
AT OFF is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch between on
and off.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch between on
and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK
DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK
The feature allows the driver’s door to automatically
unlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK (P).
The feature allows all of the doors to automatically
unlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK (P).
Programmable Modes
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 1: ON (default)
Mode 2: OFF (default)
Mode 2: OFF
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER UNLOCK
IN PARK is highlighted.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DOORS UNLOCK
IN PARK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEYLESS FT (Front) DOOR UNLOCK
KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK
This feature automatically unlocks the appropriate front
door when you approach the vehicle with the keyless
access transmitter and pull the respective door handle.
This feature automatically unlocks all of the doors when
you approach the vehicle with the keyless access
transmitter and pull either front door handle. See Door
Programmable Modes
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 1: ON (default)
Mode 2: OFF (default)
Mode 2: OFF
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEYLESS FT DOOR
UNLOCK is highlighted.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEYLESS DOORS
UNLOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCK DELAY
KEYLESS LOCK DELAY
This feature delays the locking of the vehicle’s doors for
eight seconds after a power door lock switch or the
lock button on the keyless access transmitter is pressed.
The eight second delay occurs after the last door is
closed. If the keyless access transmitter is left inside of
the vehicle, the doors will not lock.
This feature allows you to select whether the doors
automatically lock during normal vehicle exit. When the
ignition is turned off and all doors become closed,
the vehicle will determine how many keyless access
transmitters remain in the vehicle interior. If at least
one keyless access transmitter has been removed
from the interior of the vehicle, the doors will lock
after 10 seconds.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON (default)
For example, if there are two keyless access
transmitters in the vehicle and one is removed, the
other will be locked in. The keyless access transmitter
locked in the vehicle can still be used to start the vehicle
or unlock the doors, if needed. A person approaching
the outside of the locked vehicle without an authorized
keyless access transmitter, however, will not be able
to open the door, even with a transmitter in the vehicle.
Mode 2: OFF
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until LOCK DELAY is
highlighted.
You may temporarily disable the passive door
locking feature by pressing the door unlock switch
for three seconds on an open door. Passive door locking
will then remain disabled until a door lock switch is
pressed or until the power mode transitions from the
off power mode.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programmable Modes
FRONT PASS (Passenger) WINDOW LOCK
This feature allows you to choose whether or not to
have the front passenger window deactivated as part of
the window lockout button. If you would like the front
passenger window to be deactivated when the window
lockout button is pushed, turn this feature on. If this
feature is left off, the window lockout button located on
the door will deactivate only the rear windows. See
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF (default)
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEYLESS LOCK
DELAY is highlighted.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
Mode 2: OFF (default)
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until FRONT PASS
WINDOW LOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHIME VOLUME HIGH
SUSPENSION MODE
This feature allows you to adjust the volume level of the
vehicle’s warning chimes. The chime volume cannot
be turned off, only adjusted.
If your vehicle has this feature, you can select between
performance or touring modes. Performance mode is
used where road conditions or personal preference
demand more control. Touring mode is used for normal
city and highway driving.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: NORMAL (default)
Mode 2: HIGH
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: PERFORMANCE
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
Mode 2: TOURING (default)
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
To program the vehicle to a different mode:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until CHIME VOLUME
HIGH is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between the normal and high settings.
A check mark indicates that the chime volume is
set to HIGH.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until SUSPENSION
MODE is highlighted.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
SUSPENSION MODE submenu.
Memory Seat, Mirrors and
Steering Wheel
4. Turn the tune/select knob to highlight TOURING or
PERFORMANCE.
If your vehicle has the memory feature, you can
program and recall memory settings for the following
features for up to two drivers:
5. Press the tune/select knob to select the setting.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle by pressing the F6 (BACK) button,
located on the radio, to return to the PERSONAL
SETTINGS MENU.
• The driver’s seat position
• The outside rearview mirrors position
• The power tilt wheel and telescopic steering column
position
The following settings and presets are set automatically:
Exiting the Personal Settings Menu
• The language, radio and XM™ presets, tone,
volume, playback mode (AM/FM or CD), last
displayed stations, and compact disc position
Once you have finished making your selections on the
base audio system, you will automatically return to
the main audio screen after 15 seconds. You can also
press the F6 (BACK) button, located on the radio,
to return to the main audio screen.
• The last climate control setting
• The Head-Up Display (HUD) position, if your
vehicle has this feature
• Other personalization settings, for example,
remote start settings
2-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For vehicles with the base audio system, memory
features are programmed and recalled through the radio
from the DRIVER SELECTION and the DRIVER EXIT
SETTINGS submenus. See “Entering the Driver
Selection Submenu” and “Entering the Driver Exit
Settings Submenu” later in this section for more
information on recalling and programming the memory
settings using the base audio system.
Entering the Driver Selection Submenu
To enter the memory programming mode for your
driver settings:
1. Be sure the ignition is either on, in ACCESSORY,
or in RAP and place the transmission in PARK (P)
or make sure that the vehicle speed is less than
6 mph (9 km/h).
For vehicles with the Navigation system, memory
features are programmed and recalled through the
navigation display. See “Personalization” in the Index of
the Navigation System manual for more information
on programming and recalling the memory settings using
the Navigation system.
2. Press any button on the appropriate keyless access
transmitter to identify yourself as Driver 1 or Driver 2.
3. Turn on the radio by pressing the
power/volume knob.
4. Press the CNFG radio button to enter the main
menu of the radio.
For vehicles with the Navigation system, you can also
recall the memory features by using voice recognition,
if your vehicle has this feature. See “Voice Recognition”
in the Index of the Navigation System manual for
more information.
5. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to SETUP.
6. Press the tune/select knob to enter the SETUP menu.
7. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to DRIVER
SELECTION.
8. Press the tune/select knob to enter the DRIVER
SELECTION submenu. The following items will
appear:
• DRIVER 1
• DRIVER 2
• RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS
• STORE DRIVER SETTINGS
2-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS
Driver Selection Submenu Items
DRIVER 1/DRIVER 2
To recall driver settings:
The numbers on the back of each keyless access
transmitter correspond to DRIVER 1 and DRIVER 2.
If you would like to recall or store driver settings for
the driver that does not correspond to the number on
the back of the keyless access transmitter that you
are using:
1. Enter the memory programming mode for your
driver settings by following the instructions listed
previously under “Entering the Driver Selection
Submenu.”
2. From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu, turn the
tune/select knob to scroll to RECALL DRIVER
SETTINGS and press in the knob.
1. Enter the memory programming mode for your
driver settings by following the instructions listed
previously under “Entering the Driver Selection
Submenu.”
If the vehicle is in PARK (P), one beep will sound
and your previously saved driving position will
then be recalled.
2. From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu, turn the
tune/select knob to highlight the driver number that
you want, either DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2.
If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), three beeps will
sound and your previously saved driving position will
not be recalled.
3. Set your choice by pressing in the tune/select knob.
A memory recall can be stopped by pressing any
memory seat or mirror position button.
If you would like to recall or store driver settings for
the selected driver, see “RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS”
or “STORE DRIVER SETTINGS” later in this section.
If you would like the stored driving positions to be
recalled when unlocking your vehicle with the keyless
access transmitter or when starting your vehicle,
see “REMOTE RECALL MEMORY” or “START
BUTTON RECALL” under Vehicle Personalization
on page 2-60.
If you would like to recall or store exit settings for
the selected driver, see “RECALL EXIT SETTINGS” or
“STORE EXIT SETTINGS” later in this section.
2-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STORE DRIVER SETTINGS
Entering the Driver Exit Settings
Submenu
To store driver settings:
1. Adjust your settings for the driver’s seat, the outside
rearview mirrors, and the steering column to a
comfortable driving position.
To enter the memory programming mode for your
exit settings:
1. Be sure the ignition is either on, in ACCESSORY,
or in RAP and place the transmission in PARK (P)
or make sure that the vehicle speed is less than
6 mph (9 km/h).
2. Enter the memory programming mode for your
driver settings by following the instructions listed
previously under “Entering the Driver Selection
Submenu.”
2. Press any button on the appropriate keyless access
transmitter to identify yourself as Driver 1 or Driver 2.
3. From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu, turn the
tune/select knob to scroll to STORE DRIVER
3. Turn on the radio by pressing the
power/volume knob.
SETTINGS and press in the knob. Two beeps will
sound to confirm that your driver settings are saved.
4. Press the CNFG radio button to enter the main
menu of the radio.
4. Set the HUD position, if your vehicle has this
feature, the climate control temperature, fan
speed and mode settings, the radio presets, tone,
volume, playback mode (AM/FM, XM™, or CD), and
compact disc position.
5. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to SETUP.
6. Press the tune/select knob to enter the SETUP menu.
7. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to DRIVER
EXIT SETTINGS.
Your memory settings are now programmed.
Any changes that are made to the HUD, audio
system, and climate controls while driving will be
automatically stored when the ignition is turned off.
8. Press the tune/select knob to enter the DRIVER
EXIT SETTINGS submenu. The following items
will appear:
5. Repeat the procedure for a second driver by
programming the other driver number.
• RECALL EXIT SETTINGS
• STORE EXIT SETTINGS
2-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STORE EXIT SETTINGS
Driver Exit Settings Submenu Items
RECALL EXIT SETTINGS
To store exit settings:
To recall exit settings:
1. Adjust your settings for the driver’s seat, the outside
rearview mirrors, and the steering column to a
comfortable exit position.
1. Enter the memory programming mode for your
exit settings by following the instructions listed
previously under “Entering the Driver Exit Settings
Submenu.”
2. Enter the memory programming mode for your
exit settings by following the instructions listed
previously under “Entering the Driver Exit Settings
Submenu.”
2. From the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu, turn
the tune/select knob to scroll to RECALL EXIT
SETTINGS and press in the knob.
3. From the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu,
turn the tune/select knob to scroll to STORE
EXIT SETTINGS and press in the knob.
Two beeps will sound to confirm that your new
exit settings are saved.
If the vehicle is in PARK (P), one beep will sound
and your previously saved exit position will then be
recalled.
If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), three beeps will
sound and your previously saved exit position
will not be recalled.
4. Repeat the procedure for a second driver by
programming the other driver number.
A memory recall can be stopped by pressing any
memory seat or mirror position button.
If you would like the stored exit positions to be recalled
when your vehicle is in PARK (P), the vehicle is off, and
the driver’s door is opened, see “AUTO EXIT SEAT” and
page 2-60.
2-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
G. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Button (If Equipped).
Heated Steering Wheel Button (If Equipped).
Center (DIC) Buttons. See DIC Operation and
H. Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column.
on page 3-7.
page 3-17. Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped).
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) (If Equipped).
on page 3-10.
Navigation/Radio System (If Equipped).
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem. Your
front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
The hazard warning
flasher button is
located on the console,
near the shift lever.
See Instrument Panel
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Horn
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column
Heated Steering Wheel
Your vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.
The button with this
symbol is located
on the left side of
the steering wheel.
The power tilt and
telescope wheel
control is located on
the outboard side of
the steering column.
Press the button to turn the heated steering wheel
on or off. A light on the button will display when the
feature is turned on.
The steering wheel will take about three minutes to
start heating.
To operate the power tilt feature, push the control up
and the steering wheel tilts up. Push the control
down and the steering wheel goes down.
Push the control forward and the steering wheel moves
toward the front of the vehicle. Push the control
rearward and the steering wheel moves toward the rear
of the vehicle.
To set the memory position, see Vehicle Personalization
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on page 3-17.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
• Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped).
• Forward Collision Alert (FCA) (If Equipped).
on page 3-10.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. The lever returns automatically when the
turn is complete.
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
flashes in the direction
of the turn or lane
change.
• 3Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
on page 3-13.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it briefly until the lane
change is complete. The arrow will automatically flash
three times The lever returns to its original position
when it is released.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Push forward on the turn signal/multifunction lever
to change the headlamps from low to high beam.
Pull the lever back and then release it to change
from high to low beam.
Rapid flashing of arrows when signaling for a turn
or lane change can be caused by a burned-out signal
bulb. Other drivers will not see the signal.
If you turn the vehicle off with the high beams on,
the next time you start your vehicle the low beams
will be on.
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
accidents. Check the fuse for burned-out bulbs
if the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn.
for more information.
To re-activate high beams, pull lever toward you and
then push it forward again.
This light on the
instrument panel cluster
will be on, indicating
high-beam usage.
Turn Signal On Chime
If the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile (1.6 km),
a warning chime will sound and the TURN SIGNAL
ON message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. See “Turn Signal On” under
more information.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Forward Collision Alert (FCA) system provides an
audible and visual warning if you approach a vehicle
too rapidly. FCA also provides a visual warning with
no audible warning if you are following another vehicle
much too closely. FCA uses the Adaptive Cruise
Control radar to detect a vehicle directly ahead, in your
path, within a distance of 328 ft (100 m) and operates
at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this
entire section before using it.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
{CAUTION:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
FCA is only a warning system and does not
apply the brakes. When you are approaching a
vehicle or object too rapidly or when you are
following a vehicle too closely that is ahead of
you, FCA may not provide you with enough
time to avoid a collision. FCA is not designed
to warn the driver of pedestrians or animals.
Your complete attention is always required
while driving and you should be ready to
take action and apply the brakes. For more
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Forward Collision
Alert (FCA) controls are
located on the end of
the multifunction lever.
{CAUTION:
• On winding roads, FCA may not detect
a vehicle ahead. You could crash into
a vehicle ahead of you. Do not rely on
FCA on winding roads.
• When weather limits visibility, such as in
fog, rain, or snow, FCA performance is
limited. There may not be enough warning
distance to the vehicle in front of you. Do
not rely on FCA in low visibility conditions.
9(Off): This position turns the system off.
R(On): This position turns the system on.
To enable FCA, move the Adaptive Cruise Control
switch to on. To disable FCA, move the switch to off.
{CAUTION:
Make sure the Head-Up Display is on and properly
adjusted. If the HUD is not on, FCA will not be
enabled and you will not be provided with FCA audible
and visual warnings. See Head-Up Display (HUD)
on page 3-43 for more information.
When FCA is enabled, the Adaptive Cruise
Control switch is on. If you press another
Adaptive Cruise Control button, you might
go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Be careful not to press adaptive cruise buttons
unless you want to use cruise control.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning the Driver
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead
The vehicle ahead symbol will only appear on the HUD
when a vehicle ahead of you is detected in your path.
If this symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,
FCA will not respond to vehicles you may see ahead.
The symbol may disappear on curves, highway exit
ramps, or hills. Also, when another vehicle enters the
same lane as you, the FCA system will not detect
the vehicle until it is completely in your driving lane.
The alert symbol will
flash on the HUD and
a warning beep will
sound when driver
action may be required.
The driver warning is active when:
{CAUTION:
• You are approaching a vehicle too quickly.
• You are following a vehicle ahead much
too closely.
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect
a vehicle ahead. FCA may not help you avoid
a collision under these conditions. Do not use
FCA when the radar is blocked by snow, ice,
or dirt. Keep your radar clean. See “Cleaning
the System” under Adaptive Cruise Control
on page 3-20.
information.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the System
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
If so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean
the lens. See “Cleaning the System” under Adaptive
{CAUTION:
FCA may not detect and warn soon enough
to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other
objects ahead of you. You could crash into
an object ahead of you. Do not rely on FCA
when approaching stationary or slow-moving
vehicles or other objects.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature allows you to use the high-beam headlamps
to signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.
Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you to use this feature. When this is done the following
will occur:
Unnecessary Warnings
FCA may occasionally provide an unnecessary
warning to guard rails, signs, and other stationary
objects. This is normal operation, your vehicle
does not need service.
• If the headlamps are off, in low-beam or in Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the high-beam
headlamps will turn on. They will stay on as long
as the lever is held there. Release the lever to
turn them off.
Other Messages
• If the headlamps are in high-beam mode, they will
switch to low beam. To return to high-beam, push
the lever forward.
There are three messages that may appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC). They are CLEAN
RADAR, RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and
SERVICE RADAR CRUISE. See DIC Warnings
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this position for
slow, steady wiping cycles.
Windshield Wipers
1 (High Speed): Put the lever in this position for
rapid wiping cycles.
If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds
while you are driving, the exterior lamps will come on
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
information.
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
damaged, install new blades. For more information, see
7(Mist): Pull the lever down and release it for a
single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original
position. For more cycles, hold the lever down
before releasing it.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
9(Off): Put the lever in this position to turn off
the wipers.
Your vehicle (STS-V only) is equipped with a feature
that disables the wiper system when the hood is
open and your vehicle is stopped. Opening the hood
will automatically park the wipers if they are not parked.
This prevents the wipers from interfering with hood
operation. Be sure the hood is not opened when you
require the vehicle’s wipers out of the park position,
such as when changing the wiper blades.
& (Delay): Put the lever in this position to set a delay
between wipes. Turn the delay adjustment band to
set the length of the delay.
x (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set the
length of the delay between wipes when using the delay
feature. The closer you move the band toward mist,
the longer the delay. The windshield wiper lever must
be in delay for this feature to work.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A single wipe will occur each time you turn the wiper
stalk to a higher sensitivity level to indicate that the
sensitivity level has been increased.
Rainsense™ II Wipers
If your vehicle has this feature, the moisture sensor is
mounted on the interior side of the windshield behind
the rearview mirror. It is used to automatically operate
the wipers by monitoring the amount of moisture
build-up on the windshield. Wipes occur as needed to
clear the windshield depending on driving conditions
and the sensitivity setting. In light rain or snow,
fewer wipes will occur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes
will occur more frequently. The Rainsense™ wipers
operate in a delay mode as well as a continuous low
or high speed as needed. If the system is left on for long
periods of time, occasional wipes may occur without
any moisture on the windshield. This is normal and
indicates that the Rainsense™ system is activated.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and
are not affected by the Rainsense™ function. The
Rainsense™ system can be overridden at any time by
manually turning the wiper band to low or high speed.
When Rainsense™ is active, the headlamps will turn
on automatically. The headlamps will turn off again
once the wipers turn off if it is light enough outside.
If it is dark, they will remain on. See Wiper Activated
To activate the Rainsense™ system, turn the wiper band
to delay mode and select one of the four sensitivity
levels indicated on the wiper stalk. The position closest
to off is the lowest sensitivity setting, level one. This
allows more rain or snow to collect on the windshield
between wipes. Turning the wiper band away from
you to higher sensitivity levels increases the sensitivity
of the system and frequency of wipes. The highest
sensitivity setting, level four, is closest to low.
Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on
the exterior glass surface directly in front of
the moisture sensor. Doing this could cause the
moisture sensor to malfunction.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer
Headlamp Washer
Your vehicle may have headlamp washers. The headlamp
washers clear debris from the headlamp lenses.
K (Washer Fluid): The lever on the right side of the
steering column also controls the windshield washer.
There is a button at the end of the lever. To spray
washer fluid on the windshield, press the button and
hold it. The washer will spray until you release the
button. The wipers will continue to clear the window
for about six seconds after the button is released and
then stop or return to your preset speed.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
The headlamp washers are located to the inside of
the headlamps.
If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir is
low, the message CHECK WASHER FLUID will appear
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. It will
take 60 seconds after the bottle is refilled for this
message to turn off. For information on the correct
washer fluid mixture to use, see Windshield Washer
To wash the headlamps, press the washer button
located at the end of the windshield wiper lever.
Both the headlamps and the windshield will be washed.
After the first wash, the headlamps will be washed
after the fifth press of the windshield washer button.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The headlamps must be on to be washed. If the
headlamps are off, only the windshield will be washed
when the washer button is pressed. If the washer fluid
is low, the headlamp washers will not work.
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
information.
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control shuts off.
Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
These controls are
located on the end
of the multifunction
lever.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
9(Off): Move to this position to turn the system off.
R(On): Move to this position to turn on the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Move to this position to make
the vehicle resume a previously set speed or to
accelerate when cruise is already active.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin or
the stability control system activates, the cruise control
automatically disengages. See Traction Control
When road conditions allow you to safely use it again,
you may turn the cruise control back on.
T(Set/Decrease): Press this button to set the speed
or to decrease the speed when cruise is already active.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is at the set speed desired and then
the brake is applied, the cruise control is disengaged.
But it does not need to be reset.
{CAUTION:
Once the vehicle speed reaches about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more, you can move the cruise control switch
briefly from on to resume/accelerate.
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
The vehicle will go right back up to your chosen speed
and stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply
the brake. Do not hold the switch at resume/accelerate,
unless you want the vehicle to go faster.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever
and release it.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You will now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise switch from on to resume/
accelerate. Hold it there until the desired speed is
reached, and then release the switch. To increase
your speed in very small amounts, move the switch
briefly to resume/accelerate. Each time this is done,
your vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
This light on the instrument
panel cluster comes on
while cruise control is on.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If using the accelerator pedal and the set button at
end of the lever to increase cruise set speed, your new
set speed must be at least 5 mph higher than current
speed for this method to work. If it is not 5 mph higher,
switch cruise switch off, then on, and then reset your
speed using the set button.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s
speed. When going downhill, you might have to
brake to keep the vehicle’s speed down. Applying
the brake will turn off the cruise control. If you need
to apply the brake due to the grade of the downhill
slope, you might not want to attempt to use your
cruise control feature.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed desired, then release it.
Ending Cruise Control
To end a cruise control session, step lightly on the
brake pedal.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Stepping on the brake pedal will end the current cruise
control session only. Move the cruise control switch
to off to turn off the system completely.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Erasing Speed Memory
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your vehicle
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal,
the vehicle slows down to the cruise control speed
you set earlier.
When the cruise control or the ignition is turned off,
the cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adaptive Cruise Control uses radar to detect a vehicle
directly ahead in your path, within a distance of
328 ft (100 m), and operates at speeds above
Adaptive Cruise Control
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this
entire section before using it.
30 mph (48 km/h). When it is engaged by the driver,
the system can apply limited braking or acceleration
of the vehicle, automatically, to maintain a selected
following distance to the vehicle ahead. The vehicle’s
braking during Adaptive Cruise Control is comparable
to a person applying moderate pressure to the vehicle’s
brake pedal. To disengage Adaptive Cruise Control,
apply the brake. If no vehicle is in your path, your
vehicle will react like traditional cruise control.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
{CAUTION:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply hard
braking or bring the vehicle to a complete
stop. It will not respond to stopped vehicles,
pedestrians or animals. When you are
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
approaching a vehicle or object, Adaptive
Cruise Control may not have time to slow
your vehicle enough to avoid a collision.
Your complete attention is always required
while driving and you should be ready to
take action and apply the brakes. For more
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Adaptive Cruise Control is an enhancement to traditional
cruise control and is not a safety system. It allows
you to keep cruise control engaged in moderate traffic
conditions without having to constantly be reset.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
• On slippery roads, fast changes in
tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control.
Do not use cruise control on slippery
roads.
• On winding roads, Adaptive Cruise
Control may not detect a vehicle ahead.
You could crash into a vehicle ahead of
you. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control
on winding roads.
• When weather limits visibility, such as
when in fog, rain, or snow conditions,
Adaptive Cruise Control performance is
limited. There may not be enough distance
to adapt to the changing traffic conditions.
Do not use cruise control when visibility
is low.
• Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time
to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a
crash when you are driving in conditions
where vehicles may suddenly slow or
stop ahead of you, enter your lane, or
cross your vehicle’s path. If you are
driving in these conditions, do not use
Adaptive Cruise Control. The warning
beep and alert symbol may indicate
that you are driving in conditions where
Adaptive Cruise Control should not be
used. See “Alerting the Driver” in this
section.
CAUTION: (Continued)
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise controls are
located on the end of
the multifunction lever.
Engaging Adaptive Cruise Control
With the Set Button
{CAUTION:
If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Control
switch on when you are not using cruise, you
might hit a button and go into cruise when you
do not want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the Adaptive Cruise Control
switch off until you want to use cruise control.
The Adaptive Cruise controls are located on the
outboard side of the steering wheel.
9(Off): This position turns the system off.
R(On): This position turns the system on.
{CAUTION:
S(Resume/Increase): Push the switch to this symbol
to make the vehicle resume the speed set previously
or to increase the set speed when Adaptive Cruise
Control is already active.
If you operate Adaptive Cruise Control without
your Head-up Display (HUD) properly adjusted,
your Adaptive Cruise Control settings may
not be visible. You could forget your settings
and be startled by Adaptive Cruise Control
response and even lose control. Keep your
HUD on and properly adjusted when using
Adaptive Cruise Control.
T(Set/Decrease): Press this button to set the speed
or to decrease the set speed when Adaptive Cruise
Control is already active.
[ (Cancel): Press this button located on the steering
wheel to cancel adaptive cruise control.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The set speed is selected by the driver. This is the
speed you will travel if there is no vehicle detected
in your path.
This symbol appears on the
Head-Up Display (HUD)
to indicate that Adaptive
Cruise Control is active.
The number indicates
the set speed.
To set Adaptive Cruise Control, do the following:
1. Make sure the Head-Up Display (HUD) is on and
properly adjusted. You cannot engage Adaptive
Cruise Control unless the HUD is on. See Head-Up
United States version
shown, Canada similar
2. Move the switch to the on position.
3. Get up to the desired speed.
information.
4. Press in the set button at the end of the lever
and release the button.
Make sure the set speed is visible on the HUD so you
know the speed your vehicle will accelerate to if a
vehicle is not detected in your path. Keep in mind
speed limits, surrounding traffic speeds, and weather
conditions when adjusting your set speed.
5. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Once Adaptive Cruise Control is set, it might
immediately apply the brakes if it detects a vehicle
ahead that is too close or moving slower than
your vehicle.
If your vehicle is in Adaptive Cruise Control when
the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin,
the Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you can
turn the Adaptive Cruise Control back on.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Increasing Set Speed While Using
Adaptive Cruise Control
Decreasing Set Speed While Using
Adaptive Cruise Control
There are two ways to increase the set speed:
Press in the set/decrease button on the end of the lever
until you reach the lower desired speed, then release
the button.
• Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed.
Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You will now cruise at the higher speed.
To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press the
set/decrease button. Each this is done, your set speed
will be 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
• Move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch from on to
resume/increase. Hold it there until the desired set
speed is displayed in the HUD, then release the
switch. To increase your set speed in very small
amounts, move the switch briefly to resume/increase.
Each time this is done, your vehicle set speed
increases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Resuming a Set Speed
If you apply the brakes while the Adaptive Cruise
Control is at a set speed, this disengages the Adaptive
Cruise Control. But it does not need to be reset.
Once the vehicle reaches about 30 mph (48 km/h) or
more, move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch briefly
from on to resume/increase. Adaptive Cruise Control
will be engaged with the speed previously selected.
Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until the system
determines there is no vehicle in front of you. At that
point, your vehicle speed will increase to the set speed.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are six follow distances to choose from. The follow
distance selection ranges from near to far (one second
to two seconds follow time). The distance maintained
for a selected follow distance varies based on vehicle
speed. The faster the vehicle speed the further back you
will follow. Consider traffic and weather conditions when
selecting the follow distance. The range of selectable
distances may not be appropriate for all drivers and
driving conditions. If you prefer to travel at a following
distance farther than Adaptive Cruise Control allows,
disengage the system and drive manually.
Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)
When the system detects a slower moving vehicle, it will
adjust your vehicle’s speed and maintain the following
distance (gap) selected.
Use the GAP button on
the steering wheel to
adjust the follow distance
between your vehicle
and other vehicle’s.
A graphic on the HUD
indicates the selected
following distance.
This picture shows a
maximum follow distance.
Press the top of the button to increase the distance
or the bottom of the button to decrease the distance.
The first button press shows the current follow distance
setting on the HUD. The current following distance
setting is maintained until it is changed.
United States version
shown, Canada similar
The vehicles will move closer together as you select
a smaller following distance.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alerting the Driver
• A temporary condition prohibits Adaptive Cruise
Control from operating. See DIC Warnings and
The alert symbol flashes
on the HUD and a
warning beep sounds
when driver action
is required.
• A malfunction is detected in the system.
for more information.
{CAUTION:
Driver action is required when:
• Adaptive Cruise Control cannot apply sufficient
braking because you are approaching a vehicle
too rapidly.
Adaptive Cruise Control has only limited
braking ability to slow your vehicle. In some
cases, Adaptive Cruise Control may not have
time to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a
collision. Be ready to take action and apply
the brakes yourself. See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2.
• The vehicle speed drops below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Approaching and Following a Vehicle
{CAUTION:
The vehicle ahead
symbol only appears
on the HUD when a
vehicle ahead is
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect
a vehicle ahead. Adaptive Cruise Control may
not have time to slow your vehicle enough
to avoid a collision. Do not use Adaptive
Cruise Control when the radar is blocked by
snow, ice, or dirt. Keep your radar clean.
See “Cleaning the System” later in this section.
detected in your path.
If this symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,
Adaptive Cruise Control will not respond to vehicles
you may see ahead.
Adaptive Cruise Control automatically slows your
vehicle down when approaching a slower moving
vehicle. It then adjusts your speed to follow the
vehicle in front at the selected following distance.
Your speed increases or decreases to follow the
vehicle in front of you but will not exceed the set
speed. It may apply limited braking, if necessary.
When braking is active, your brake lights come on.
It may feel or sound different than if you were
applying the brakes yourself. This is normal.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and
react to stationary or slow-moving vehicles
or other objects ahead of you. Your vehicle
may accelerate toward objects, such as a
stopped vehicle that suddenly appears after
the lead vehicle changes lanes. Your complete
attention is always required while driving
and you should be ready to take action and
apply the brakes.
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and
react to stationary or slow-moving vehicles
or other objects ahead of you. You could
crash into an object ahead of you. Do not use
Adaptive Cruise Control when approaching
stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other
objects.
Low-Speed Deactivation
If your speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h) while
following a vehicle ahead, Adaptive Cruise Control
will begin to disengage. The driver alert symbol on
the HUD will flash and the warning beep will sound.
The driver must take action since Adaptive Cruise
Control will not slow the vehicle to a stop.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deactivation When Head-Up Display
is Turned Off
Passing a Vehicle/Adaptive Cruise Control
Override
If the HUD is turned off when Adaptive Cruise Control
is engaged, it will begin to disengage. A warning
beep sounds and the message RADAR CRUISE NOT
READY appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
additional information. If Adaptive Cruise Control
was braking when the HUD is turned off, the braking
will continue briefly.
To increase speed to pass a vehicle, use the accelerator
pedal. While you are doing this, the system will not
automatically apply the brakes. A PEDAL APPLIED
ACC OVERRIDE message will appear on the HUD.
information. Once you pass the vehicle and remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal, Adaptive Cruise
Control returns to normal operation and the brakes
can be applied, if needed.
{CAUTION:
If you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal,
the system will not automatically apply the
brakes. You could crash into a vehicle ahead
of you. Do not rest your foot on the accelerator
pedal when using Adaptive Cruise Control.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Curves in the Road
{CAUTION:
Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitations in
curves, it may respond to a vehicle in another
lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle
in your lane. You could crash into a vehicle
ahead of you, or lose control of your vehicle.
Give extra attention in curves and be ready
to use the brakes if necessary. Select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
When following a vehicle and entering a curve, Adaptive
Cruise Control could lose track of the vehicle in your
lane and your vehicle could accelerate. When this
happens, the vehicle ahead symbol will not appear
on the HUD.
Adaptive Cruise Control might operate differently in a
sharp curve. It might reduce your speed if the curve
is too sharp.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highway Exit Ramps
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of the
vehicle ahead and accelerate up to your set
speed while entering or on highway exit ramps.
You could be startled by this acceleration and
even lose control of the vehicle. Disengage
Adaptive Cruise Control before entering a
highway exit ramp. Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control while entering or on exit ramps.
Adaptive Cruise Control might detect a vehicle that is
not in your lane and apply the brakes.
Other Vehicle Lane Changes
Adaptive Cruise Control might occasionally provide a
driver alert and/or braking that you consider unnecessary.
It could respond to signs, guardrails, and other stationary
objects when entering or exiting a curve. This is normal
operation. Your vehicle does not need service.
If another vehicle enters the same lane as you,
Adaptive Cruise Control will not detect the vehicle
until it is completely in the lane. Be ready to take
action and apply the brakes yourself.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Adaptive Cruise Controls on Hills
and When Towing a Trailer
Erasing Set Speed Memory
When the Adaptive Cruise Control switch or the ignition
is turned off, the set speed memory is erased.
Other Messages
There are three messages that may appear on the
DIC. They are SERVICE RADAR CRUISE, RADAR
CRUISE NOT READY and CLEAN RADAR. These
messages will appear to indicate a problem with
the Adaptive Cruise Control. See DIC Warnings and
How well Adaptive Cruise Control works on hills
and while a trailer is being towed depends on your
vehicle speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hills. It might not detect a vehicle
in your lane while driving on hills. While going up steep
hills, you might want to use the accelerator pedal to
maintain your vehicle speed. While going downhill
and towing a trailer, you might want to brake to
keep your vehicle speed down. Applying the brake
disengages the system. You may choose not to
use Adaptive Cruise Control on steep hills when
towing a trailer.
Cleaning the System
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
If so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean the
emblem/lens, located in the center of the front outside
grille. Remember, do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in
icy conditions, or when visibility is low, such as in fog,
rain or snow.
To clean the emblem/lens, wipe the surface with a soft
cloth. After cleaning the emblem/lens, engage the
Adaptive Cruise Control. If you are unable to do so,
see your dealer/retailer.
Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control
Apply the brake pedal or move the Adaptive Cruise
Control switch to off, to disengage the system.
Adaptive Cruise Control information does not appear
on the HUD while the system is not engaged.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Due to the switch design, the automatic lights may be
disabled even if the control is in the AUTO position.
Headlamps
To enable automatic lighting do any of the following:
• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to off
and release the switch. It returns back to the
AUTO position by itself.
• Turn the headlamp control from the parking
lamp position to AUTO.
• Turn the headlamp control from the headlamp
position to AUTO.
The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of
the turn signal/multifunction lever.
O(Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control with
this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
To disable automatic lighting do any of the following:
• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to off
and release the switch. It returns back to the
AUTO position by itself.
O(On/Off): Turn the control to this position to turn
off all lamps and automatic lighting features including
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and IntelliBeam™.
• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to the
parking lamp position.
This is a momentary switch that springs back to the
AUTO position when released. An AUTOMATIC LIGHTS
ON message appears on the DIC when automatic
lights are enabled or an AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF
message appears on the DIC when the automatic
lights are disabled.
• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to the
headlamp position.
Disabling automatic lighting disables the automatic
headlamp operation, DRL, and IntelliBeam™
High-Beams (if the vehicle has them).
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
put the headlamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode,
turns the exterior lamps on and off depending upon
how much light is available outside of the vehicle.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam™
;(Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the following:
AUTO 3(IntelliBeam™ On/Off): Press and release
the IntelliBeam™ button on the inside rear view mirror.
The IntelliBeam™ indicator on the mirror turns on.
Once the system has been turned on, it remains on each
time the vehicle is started. Additionally, the IntelliBeam™
system must be enabled.
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
To enable the IntelliBeam™ System, turn the exterior
lamp control to AUTO, with the turn signal/multifunction
lever in its neutral position. The High-Beam On
Light appears on the instrument panel cluster when
the high-beams are on. See Highbeam On Light
on page 3-72. Your vehicle has variable intensity
high-beams. The high-beam indicator on the instrument
panel cluster comes on as soon as the high-beams
start to come on, and remains on until the high-beams
have completely turned off. All vehicles that have
IntelliBeam™, however, quickly turn off the high-beams
if the system detects the sudden presence of vehicle
lights ahead.
5(Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
IntelliBeam™ Intelligent High-Beam
Headlamp Control System
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this
entire section before using it.
IntelliBeam™ is an enhancement to the vehicle’s
headlamp system. Using a digital light sensor located
on the back of the rearview mirror, this system turns
the high-beam headlamps on and off according to
surrounding traffic conditions.
Driving with IntelliBeam™
IntelliBeam™ only activates the high-beams when
driving over 20 mph (32 km/h).
The IntelliBeam™ system turns the high-beam
headlamps on when it is dark enough, there is no other
traffic present, and the IntelliBeam™ system is enabled.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The high-beam headlamps remain on, under the
control of IntelliBeam™, until any of the following
situations occur:
• The IntelliBeam™ system is turned off at the inside
rearview mirror.
• The vehicle’s speed drops below 15 mph (24 km/h).
IntelliBeam™ may not turn off the high-beams if the
system cannot detect other vehicle’s lamps because
of any of the following:
• The system detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps.
• The system detects a preceding vehicle’s taillamps.
• The others vehicle’s lamp(s) are missing, damaged,
obstructed from view, or otherwise undetected.
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are covered with dirt,
snow and/or road spray.
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) cannot be detected due
to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray,
mist, or other airborne obstructions.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is dirty, cracked,
or obstructed by something that blocks the view
of the IntelliBeam™ light sensor.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is covered with ice,
dirt, haze, or other obstructions.
• Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end of
the vehicle points upward, causing the IntelliBeam™
sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps
and taillamps.
• You are driving on winding or hilly roads.
You might need to manually disable or cancel the
high-beam headlamps by turning the low-beam
headlamps on, if any of the above conditions exist.
• The outside light is bright enough that high-beam
headlamps are not required.
• The high-beam headlamps are manually
turned on or you use the flash-to-pass feature.
When either of these conditions occur, the
IntelliBeam™ feature is temporarily disabled until
the high-beam stalk is returned to the neutral
position. If either of these conditions occur and
IntelliBeam™ already has the high-beam headlamps
on, the IntelliBeam™ feature is disabled and the
IntelliBeam™ light in the mirror turns off.
• The exterior lamp control is turned to any setting
except AUTO.
When this occurs, IntelliBeam™ is disabled until
the control is turned back to the AUTO position
and the AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ON message
displays on the DIC.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling and Resetting IntelliBeam™
at the Rearview Mirror
Cleaning the IntelliBeam™ Light Sensor
The light sensor is
located on the inside
of the vehicle at the
back of the rearview
mirror.
IntelliBeam™ can be disabled and reset to the original
factory setting by using the controls on the inside
rearview mirror.
AUTO 3(IntelliBeam™ On/Off): To disable the
system, press this button on the inside rearview
mirror. The IntelliBeam™ indicator turns off and does
not come back on until the IntelliBeam™ button is
pressed again.
When IntelliBeam™ has turned on the high-beams,
pull or push the high-beam stalk. This disables
IntelliBeam™ and the IntelliBeam™ indicator on the
rearview mirror turns off. To re-enable IntelliBeam™,
press the IntelliBeam™ button on the mirror.
Clean the light sensor window, periodically, using
glass cleaner on a soft cloth. Gently wipe the sensor
window. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the
surface of the sensor window.
A different sensitivity setting is available for dealer
diagnostics. This is done by pushing and holding this
button for 20 seconds until the light flashes three times.
If you accidentally activate this, the vehicle’s setting
automatically resets each time the ignition is turned off
and then on again; otherwise, refer to the text above
for resetting the system.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers have been in use for
about six seconds. For this feature to work, automatic
for additional information.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold
in Canada.
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. They will also turn
off if the windshield wiper control is turned off.
The DRL system will make the turn signal lamps
come on when the following conditions are met:
• It is still daylight and the ignition is on,
• the automatic lights are enabled, and
• the transmission is not in PARK (P).
Headlamps on Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
information.
When DRL are on, only the front turn signal lamps will
be on. No other exterior lamps will be on when the DRL
are being used. The instrument panel will not be lit.
When the automatic lights are enabled and it is dark
enough outside, the DRL will turn off and the low-beam
headlamps will turn on. When it is bright enough
outside, the low-beam headlamps will go off, and the
DRL will turn back on. If the vehicle is started in a
dark garage, the automatic headlamp system will
come on immediately. Once the vehicle leaves the
garage, it will take about one minute for the automatic
headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
During that delay, the instrument panel cluster may
not be as bright as usual. Make sure the instrument
panel brightness lever is in the full bright position.
Light Sensor
To operate your vehicle with the DRL off, turn
the exterior lamp control off and then do one of
the following:
• Turn the exterior lamp control to the parking
lamp position.
• Turn the exterior lamp control to the headlamp
position.
• Turn the exterior lamp control from AUTO to
off and back to AUTO.
An AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF message will appear
on the DIC, showing that automatic lighting has
been disabled. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-80.
The light sensor for the DRL is located on top of
the instrument panel. If the sensor is covered, it will
read dark, and the exterior lamps may come on
when they are not needed.
The regular headlamp system should be turned
on when needed.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamps
Twilight Sentinel®
Twilight Sentinel® can turn your lamps on and off for you.
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions.
The fog lamp controls are located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
-(Fog Lamps): The band with this symbol is used to
turn the fog lamps on and off.
The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps to work.
To turn the fog lamps on, turn the fog lamp band on
the lever up to the dot and release it. The band
will return to its original position.
To turn the fog lamps off, turn the fog lamp band up
to the dot and release it. The band will return to
its original position, and the fog lamps will turn off.
If the high-beam headlamps are turned on, the
fog lamps will also turn off. They will turn back on
again when you switch back to low-beam headlamps.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
Twilight Sentinel® work, so be sure it is not covered.
With Twilight Sentinel® the following will happen:
• When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal
lamps (DRL) will go off, and the headlamps and
parking lamps will come on. The other lamps
that come on with headlamps will also come on.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps
to be on along with the fog lamps.
• When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps
will go off, and the front turn signal lamps (DRL)
will come on, as long as the exterior lamp switch
is in the off position.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once you
leave the garage, it will take about one minute for the
automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is
light outside. During that delay, the instrument panel
cluster might not be as bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel brightness control is in full bright
for more information.
the delay time that you want. You can also select
no delay time.
If the ignition is turned off with the exterior lamp switch
in the parking lamp or headlamp position, the Twilight
Sentinel® delay will not occur. The lamps will turn off
as soon as the switch is turned off.
As with any vehicle, the regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.
You can idle the vehicle with the lamps off, even when
it is dark outside. First set the parking brake while
the ignition is in OFF/ACCESSORY. Then start the
vehicle. The lamps will stay off until the parking brake
is released.
Twilight Sentinel® also provides exterior illumination
as you leave the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel® has
turned on the lamps when you turn off the ignition,
the lamps will remain on until:
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If the parking lamps or headlamps have been left on,
the exterior lamps will turn off about 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned off. This protects against draining
the battery in case you have accidentally left the
headlamps or parking lamps on. The battery saver
does not work if the headlamps are turned on after
the ignition is turned off.
• The exterior lamp switch is moved from off to
the parking lamp position.
If you need to leave the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control to turn
the lamps back on.
• A delay time that you select has elapsed.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Entry Lighting
The entry lighting system turns on the reading and
dome lamps and the backlighting to the exterior lamp
control when a door is opened or if you press the
remote keyless entry transmitter unlock button.
If activated by the transmitter, the lighting will remain
active for about 25 seconds. The entry lighting system
uses the light sensor; it must be dark outside in order
for the lamps to turn on. The lamps turn off about
25 seconds after the last door is closed. They will dim
to off if the ignition is on, or immediately deactivate if
the power locks are activated.
Parade Dimming
Base Level Shown,
Uplevel Similar
This feature prohibits dimming of the instrument panel
displays and backlighting during daylight hours when
the key is in the ignition and the headlamps are on.
This feature operates with the light sensor and is fully
automatic. When the light sensor reads darkness outside
and the parking lamps are active, the instrument panel
displays can be adjusted by turning the instrument panel
brightness knob. See Instrument Panel Brightness
on page 3-41 for additional information.
Press the center knob on the DIC control panel until
the knob pops out. Then turn the knob clockwise
to brighten the lights or counterclockwise to dim
them. If the knob is turned completely clockwise,
the interior lamps turn on.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the battery continues to discharge, even with the
engine idling at a higher rpm setting, some electrical
loads will automatically be reduced. When this occurs,
the rear window defogger may take slightly longer
to clear the glass and the fan may cut back to a lower
speed. For more battery saving information, see
“Battery Saver Active Message” under DIC Warnings
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console.
These lamps come on automatically when any door is
opened.
For manual operation, press the button next to each
lamp to turn it on or off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)
that estimates the battery’s temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best
performance and extended life of the battery.
Battery Load Management
The battery load management feature is designed to
monitor the vehicle’s electrical load and determine when
the battery is in a heavy discharge condition. During
times of high electrical loading, the engine may idle
at a higher revolutions per minute (rpm) setting
than normal to make sure the battery charges.
High electrical loads may occur when several of the
following are on: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps,
rear window defogger, the climate control fan at
high speeds, heated seats and engine cooling fans.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage
is raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage
move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,
an alert will be displayed.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator (alternator) may not be
spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power
that is needed for very high electrical loads.
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
This feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s battery
against drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp,
glove box lamp, or the garage door opener. When the
ignition is turned off, the power to these features will
automatically turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes if
a new car has 15 miles (24 km) or less). Power will
be restored for an additional 10 minutes if any door is
opened, the trunk is opened or the courtesy lamp switch
is turned on.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
Head-Up Display (HUD)
{CAUTION:
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels
of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to
the driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message might be displayed, such as Battery Saver
Active or Service Battery Charging System. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the
driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible.
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in
your field of view, it may take you more time
to see things you need to see when it is dark
outside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dim
and placed low in your field of view.
For vehicles with the Head-Up Display (HUD), it projects
some of the driver information that appears on the
instrument panel cluster onto the windshield.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The information may be displayed in English or metric
units and appears as an image focused out toward
the front of your vehicle. To change from English
to metric units, see DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-74.
The HUD consists of the following information:
• Speedometer
• Turn Signal Indicators
• High-Beam Indicator Symbol
• Driver Shift Control Transmission Feature,
on page 2-32
United States version shown, Canada similar
Be sure to continue scanning your displays, controls
and driving environment just as you would in a vehicle
without HUD. If you never look at your instrument
panel cluster, you may not see something important,
such as a warning light. Under important warning
conditions, the CHECK GAGES message will
display in the HUD. View your Driver Information
Center (DIC) for more information.
• Check Gages Icon
• Adaptive Cruise Control Features and Indicators
page 3-20
• Forward Collision Alert Features and Indicators
(If Equipped), see Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System on page 3-10
• Radio Features
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The HUD controls are
located to the left of
the steering wheel on
the DIC control panel.
To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly,
do the following:
1. Adjust the seat to a comfortable driving position.
If you change your seat position later, you may
have to re-adjust your HUD.
2. Start your engine and press the top or bottom of the
HUD button to center the HUD image in your view.
The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down,
not side-to-side.
3. Turn the knob on the DIC control panel to adjust
the brightness of the HUD image.
The brightness of the HUD image is determined by the
light conditions in the direction your vehicle is facing and
where you have the HUD set. If you are facing a dark
object or a heavily shaded area, your HUD may anticipate
that you are entering a dark area and may begin to dim.
~ (Head-Up Display): Press to change the position
of the HUD on the windshield.
To adjust the brightness of the HUD image, press the
knob on the center of the DIC control panel in until
it pops out and then pull the knob until is completely
extended. Turn the knob clockwise or counter-clockwise
to increase or decrease the brightness. Turn the
knob all the way to the left to turn off the HUD image.
Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD image
harder to see.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
As light shines out from the HUD, it is possible for light
to shine back in. In rare occurrences, when the sun
is at a specific angle and position, the sun’s rays can
shine back into the HUD. When this occurs, the display
device within the HUD will be temporarily illuminated.
The event will end when the vehicle’s angle to the
sun changes.
The windshield is part of the HUD system.
The following Adaptive Cruise Control message
may appear in the HUD:
The PEDAL APPLIED ACC OVERRIDE message
indicates that you are pressing your foot on the
accelerator pedal and overriding Adaptive Cruise
Control. While this is being done, the system will not
automatically apply the brakes. Once you remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal, Adaptive Cruise
Control will return to normal operation and be able
to apply the brakes, if needed.
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove
any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity
of the HUD image.
To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on a
soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry it.
An Adaptive Cruise Control active symbol, alert symbol
or vehicle ahead symbol may also appear. See Adaptive
Notice: When cleaning, be careful not to scratch the
HUD or camera lenses. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the HUD lens because the cleaner could
leak inside the unit and cause damage.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Your vehicle is equipped with accessory power outlets.
The outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment
such as a cellular telephone, CB radio, etc.
If the ignition is on and you cannot see the HUD image,
check to see if:
• Something is covering the HUD unit.
• The brightness is adjusted properly.
Your vehicle has one outlet in front of the center
console, one in the center console lid and there may be
an additional outlet in the rear of the center console.
• The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height.
• Ambient light in the direction your vehicle is
facing is low.
Your vehicle may have a small cap that must be
removed to access the accessory power outlet.
If it does, when not using the outlet be sure to cover
it with the protective cap.
on page 5-117.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information on
the accessory power outlets.
Ashtray
For vehicles with an ashtray, it is located under the
climate control panel on the center console. Press
on the door to release the ashtray. The ashtray
automatically slides open for use.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating
of 20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding electrical equipment.
To empty the ashtray with the ashtray in full open
position, locate the release button to the right of the ash
receiver and slide it to the right (in the direction of the
arrow). The ash receiver will unlock and lift slightly and
can then be easily removed from the housing. To replace
the ash receiver, place it into position in the ashtray
housing and push down firmly until it locks into place.
Follow the proper installation instructions that are
included with any electrical equipment you install.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug because the power outlets
are designed for accessory power plugs only.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold
a cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage
rating of 15 amperes.
Dual Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled
for the vehicle with this system.
Automatic Operation
The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray.
The vehicle does not have any cigarette lighters for
the rear seat passengers.
To activate the cigarette lighter, push it into the heating
element and let go. When the lighter is ready it will
pop back out by itself.
Vehicles With Heated and Ventilated Seats Shown,
Vehicles Without Similar
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressed and
the temperature is set, the system automatically controls
the inside temperature, the air delivery mode, the air
conditioning compressor, and the fan speed. AUTO will
appear on the display next to the fan, mode indicators,
and recirculation indicator if the vehicle has a air
quality sensor.
You can switch from English to metric units through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so some water might drip underneath the vehicle
while idling or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Manual Operation
1. Press the AUTO button.
yN z(Mode): Pressing the mode switch and
changing the mode cancels automatic operation and
allows the operator to manually select the air delivery
location. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting,
generally, between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C).
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature setting
will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster.
If the system is set at the warmest temperature
setting, the system will try to continuously heat the
vehicle and will not adjust the system down as the
vehicle warms up.
The outboard air outlets always receive airflow
regardless of the mode selected. See Outlet Adjustment
on page 3-54 to change this airflow from the outboard
outlets.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
In cold weather, the system can start at reduced
fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into the vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system starts
out blowing air at the floor, but can automatically
change modes as the vehicle warms up to maintain
the chosen temperature setting. The length of
time needed for warm up depends on the outside
temperature and the length of time that has elapsed
since the vehicle was last driven.
Y(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
\(Bi-Level): This mode splits the air between
the instrument panel outlets and the floor outlets.
In automatic operation, cooler air is directed to the
upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
[(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard
outlets, and a little air directed to the windshield and
side windows.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take
from 10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature,
if necessary.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The mode switch can also be used to select the defog
mode. Information on defogging and defrosting can
be found later in this section.
In some conditions, using recirculation for long periods
of time can cause the air inside the vehicle to become
too dry or stuffy. To prevent this from happening,
after the air in the vehicle has cooled, select AUTO to
return to automatic climate control operation or push
the recirculation button again to select outside air.
yAz(Fan): Press this switch to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Pressing this switch cancels
automatic operation and allows the operator to manually
select the amount of airflow. Press AUTO to return to
automatic operation.
Press this button a second time to select outside air.
:(Outside Air): This mode forces the system to
pull air from outside the vehicle. It can be used to bring
fresh air into the vehicle.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter
may need to be replaced. For more information,
Air Quality Sensor: Your vehicle could have an air
quality sensor to help limit the climate control system
from pulling in some harmful exhaust fumes from older,
poorly running, or diesel-equipped vehicles that are
driving near you. This sensor, when active, monitors the
air quality in front of your vehicle and switches to air
recirculation when poor quality air is detected outside
your vehicle. Press the AUTO button on the climate
control to activate the air quality sensor. The word AUTO
comes on the center of the climate control display.
While the air quality sensor senses poor quality air,
the recirculation graphic displays.
h(Recirculation): Press this button to control the
air source for the climate control system. If in AUTO
mode, press this button once to select recirculation.
This mode keeps outside air from coming in the vehicle
and recirculates the air in the vehicle. It can be used
to prevent outside air and odors from entering the
vehicle or to help cool the air inside the vehicle
more quickly.
Recirculation is not available in the defrost mode
and shuts off when defog mode is selected. Both of
these features are designed to limit fogging in the
vehicle. If recirculation is selected during defog mode,
it automatically turns off after 10 minutes to limit
problems with fogging.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Under some conditions, the air quality sensor system
does not operate. In cold weather, the system might
not be active (even if AUTO is displayed) because
of concerns of fogging your windows, which may occur
by activating recirculation mode. Also, the air quality
sensor system does not remain in recirculation mode
for extended periods of time that could cause stuffy
or very dry conditions in the vehicle. Following a poorly
running vehicle for an extended period of time may
not keep recirculation active indefinitely.
O(Power Passenger’s Temperature): Press the
power button located on the passenger’s side of
the climate control panel to turn the passenger’s climate
control system on if they wish to have a different
setting than the driver. Turn the knob to increase or
decrease the temperature for the front passenger.
Turning the passenger’s side power button off will not
shut off the climate control system for the passenger.
The system is set to the same setting as the driver.
{(Ventilated Seat): Press this button, to turn
on the driver or passenger’s side ventilated seat,
if the vehicle has this feature. See Heated and
The air quality sensor does not activate due to organic
odors, like skunk, and may not activate on many
chemical-related odors. If you wish to limit these types
of odors, manually select recirculation. Your vehicle
could also have a charcoal filter that can limit many
odors from being pulled into your vehicle. This
filter needs to be changed periodically. See Scheduled
system does not protect against carbon monoxide (CO),
which you cannot see or smell. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-38.
J(Heated Seat): Press this button, to turn on the
driver or passenger’s side heated seat and seatback,
if the vehicle has this feature. See Heated and
^(Air Conditioning): Press this button to manually
turn off the air conditioning compressor. Press AUTO
to return to automatic operation. To limit fogging on
the windshield, the air conditioning compressor
cannot be off while in the defrost mode.
O(Power Driver’s Temperature): Press the power
button located on the driver’s side of the climate
control panel to turn the entire climate control system
on or off. Turn the knob to increase or decrease
the temperature inside the vehicle.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the
vehicle facing the sun. Do not cover the sensors or the
automatic climate control system will not work properly.
Sensors
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass.
This can be minimized if the climate control system
is used properly. There are two modes to clear fog
from the windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly.
yN z(Mode): Press this button until defog appears
on the display.
-(Defog): This mode directs the air between the
windshield and floor outlets with some air supplied to
the outboard panel outlets and side window defogging
outlets. When this mode is selected, the system turns off
recirculation and runs the air-conditioning compressor
unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
The recirculation mode is cancelled when the system
enters the defog mode. If recirculation is selected while
in the defog mode, it is cancelled after 10 minutes.
There is a solar sensor located on the instrument panel,
near the windshield.
There is also an interior temperature sensor located
next to the steering wheel on the instrument panel.
These sensors monitor the solar radiation and the air
inside the vehicle, then use the information to adjust
the temperature, the fan speed and the air delivery
system, in order to maintain the selected temperature.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is fogging on the side windows, remain in
defog or defrost mode until they clear.
=(Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure to
clear as much snow from the rear window as possible.
0(Defrost): Press this button to direct most of the
air to the windshield, with some air directed to the
side windows and outboard panel outlets. In this mode,
the system automatically turns off recirculation and
runs the air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation
cannot be selected while in the defrost mode.
The rear window defogger turns off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed. If the vehicle’s speed
is above 30 mph (48 km/h), the rear defogger stays
on continuously. If turned on again, the defogger
only runs for about five minutes before turning off.
The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the
button again or by turning off the engine.
This mode can also cause the fan speed and air
temperature to increase.
The heated outside rearview mirrors also heat to help
clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when
the rear window defogger is on. See Outside Power
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
The rear window defogger only works when the
ignition is on or during remote start, if programmed.
See “Personal Settings Menu” under Vehicle
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outlet Adjustment
Rear Climate Control System
Use the lever located in the center of each outlet to
change the direction of the airflow, either side-to-side
or up and down. Use the thumbwheels to open or close
the outlets to adjust the airflow.
Turn the thumbwheel towards the vehicle door to open
the outlets and allow the maximum amount of air to
enter your vehicle. Turn the thumbwheel towards
the center console to close the outlets and minimize
the amount of air entering the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a rear climate control system.
The base model includes air outlets in the rear of
the center console for cooling and under-seat air
outlets for heating. The temperature, quantity, and
air delivery location is controlled automatically by
the front climate control system.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of your
vehicle more effectively.
• If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter
may need to be replaced. For more information, see
Some vehicles are equipped with an optional climate
control panel for the rear passenger, located on the
back of the center console.
The left knob controls the temperature of the air to
the rear passengers. Turning the knob to the left will
make the air cooler. Turning the knob to the right
will make the air warmer.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The right knob controls the air delivery to the rear
passengers. Turning the knob all the way to the left will
shut off airflow to the rear passengers. Operating with
the rear air delivery off may make the entire vehicle
warm or cool less quickly. It may also increase the air
rush sound of the front system.
two climate control knobs on the rear climate control
panel, to control the rear heated seats. See Heated
Be sure to keep the area under the front seats clear
of any objects so the air in your vehicle can circulate
effectively.
9(Off): This is the off position.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Y (Vent): This mode directs all the rear passenger
airflow to the outlets in the console. This is the
normal position for cool down conditions.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passenger
compartment air filter. There are two types of filters
available. There is a standard dust filter that traps small
particles including pollen. There is, also, a dust/odor
filter available that traps dust and pollen and also uses
a charcoal element to help reduce many offensive
odors from entering your vehicle. The filter will need
to be changed periodically. For information on how
often to change the passenger compartment air filter,
\(Bi-Level): This mode directs airflow to the
console outlets and the floor.
[(Floor): This mode directs all of the airflow to the
floor. This is the normal position for warm up conditions.
The amount of airflow to the rear passengers is
controlled automatically by the front climate control
system, regardless of optional equipment. Airflow to
the rear system will be turned off when defrost is
selected on the front climate control panel to direct
air to clear the windshield.
Notice: Driving without a passenger compartment
air filter in place can cause water and small particles,
like paper and leaves, to be pulled into your climate
control system which may cause damage to it. Make
sure you always replace the old filter with a new one.
Vehicles equipped with a rear climate control panel,
also, have heated rear seats. There are two buttons,
each with three indicator lights, located between the
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. To access the filter, remove the plastic water
deflector by lifting the outboard edge of the
deflector to release the retention tab.
4. Lift the inboard edge of the deflector to release
the retention tab.
5. Lift and slide the water deflector toward the
inboard side and remove it.
The access panel for the passenger compartment air
filter is located under the hood near the windshield,
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See Engine
information on location. See Doing Your Own Service
own service work.
To access the passenger compartment air filter,
do the following:
6. The top edge of the filter should be visible.
Reach in and lift the filter out, pulling upward
and toward the front of the vehicle.
1. Pull back the rubber hood seal from the edge
of the leaf screen vent cover.
7. Insert the new air filter by sliding it back into
place. Make sure the arrow on the filter is
pointing toward the passenger compartment.
2. Remove the three fasteners that hold the filter
access cover in place and slide the cover off.
Reverse steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the water
deflector, filter cover and the hood seal.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know
when there is a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages,
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays
on while you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section
that tells
you what to do about it. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly – and even dangerous. So please get to know
your warning lights and gages. They are a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to the warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
for more information.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they are working. If you
are familiar with this section, you should not be
alarmed when this happens.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will need to know to drive safely
and economically.
United States Base version shown, Canada and Uplevel similar
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
See “MPH (km)” under DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-74 for more information.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime will come on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Your vehicle’s odometer works together
with the driver information center. You can set a Trip
A and a Trip B odometer. See “Trip Information” under
information.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed,
the new one will be set to the correct mileage total
of the old odometer.
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will
come on.
Tachometer
This gage indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
will sound for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would only
occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
The passenger safety belt light will also come on
and stay on for several seconds, then it will flash for
several more.
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system
for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. The system check includes the
airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
The light should go out
and the system is ready.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are
driving, your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your overhead console has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
United States
Canada
The airbag readiness light should flash for a
few seconds when you start the engine. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed immediately.
If there is a problem with the airbag system,
an airbag Driver Information Center (DIC) message
may also come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-80 for more information.
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag
status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds as a system check.
If you use remote start to start your vehicle from a
distance, if your vehicle has this feature, you may not
see the system check.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in
the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
for more on this, including important safety information.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
Charging System Light
This light will come
on briefly when you
turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show you it is working.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens,
have the vehicle serviced promptly, because
an adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-60 for more on this, including
important safety information.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have
a problem with the charging system. A charging system
Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also
for more information. This light could indicate that
you have problems with a generator drive belt,
or another electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. If you must drive a short distance with the
light on, be certain to turn off all your accessories,
such as the radio and air conditioner.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does
not release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake
is fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the
pedal is harder to push, or the pedal may go closer to
the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning
light on can lead to an accident. If the light
is still on after you have pulled off the road
and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
for service.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
engine on. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so
it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antilock Brake System
Warning Light
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
If the Traction Control
System (TCS) warning
light comes on and stays
on, there may be a
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light will come
on briefly when you
start the engine.
problem with the TCS.
The TCS warning light will come on briefly when the
engine is started. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it
is safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start
the engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but
you do not have antilock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on, you do not have antilock
brakes and there is a problem with your regular
The light will also come on if you turn the TCS off using
the traction control on/off button located on the console.
If this light stays on or comes on while you are driving,
pull off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
Turn your engine off and then restart it. If the light still
stays on or comes back on again while you are driving,
your vehicle needs service. Have the TCS inspected as
soon as possible. See Traction Control System (TCS)
more information.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
all brake related DIC messages.
page 4-7 for more information.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lane Departure Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Your vehicle may have
the lane departure
warning system.
The engine coolant
temperature warning
light will come on
when the engine
is very hot.
This light will also come on briefly when the vehicle
is started.
This light will come on green, briefly, when the vehicle
is started to show that it is working. This light will
also come on green if the system detects a left or
right lane marking. This light will change to amber
and flash and three beeps will sound if you cross a
detected lane marking without using your turn signal.
For more information, see the Index in the Navigation
Manual.
If the light does not go out or comes on and stays
on while driving, there may be a problem with the
cooling system. Driving with engine coolant temperature
light on could cause your vehicle to overheat, see
more information.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Tire Pressure Light
This gage shows the
engine coolant
temperature.
This light comes on briefly
when the engine is started.
It can be used to see when your engine has warmed up
and to make sure your cooling system is operating
properly. If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area,
the engine coolant is too hot and the engine coolant
temperature warning light will come on. See Engine
This light will also come on when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center
(DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC Warnings and
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to
do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.
If a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor
System, this light will flash for approximately 60 seconds
and then stay on solid for the remainder of the ignition
for more information.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of
the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The check engine light
comes on to indicate
that there is an OBD II
problem and service
is required.
This light comes on briefly, as a check to show it is
working, as you start the engine. If the light does not
come on, have it repaired. This light also comes
on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system
on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might
be required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If the Light Is Flashing
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. The
condition is usually corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
The following can prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the engine off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If the Light Is On Steady
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If none of the above steps have made the light turn
off, your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have developed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced the battery or if the battery
has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during normal
driving. This may take several days of routine driving.
If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your
dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Oil Pressure Light
To perform a check engine light bulb check with the
keyless ignition, make sure the transmitter fob is in the
page 2-28. Press the bottom of the Acc. button on the
instrument panel and hold the button down for five
seconds. The instrument panel, including the check
engine light, will light up and the ignition will be on,
but the engine will not start — if you press the bottom
of the Acc. button only briefly, less than five seconds,
the accessory power mode will be turned on, but not
the ignition. After the bulb check, be sure to press and
release the Acc. button again to turn the ignition off
and avoid draining the vehicle’s battery.
Your vehicle may have
this feature.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has an oil problem, this light may stay
on after the engine is started, or come on while you
are driving.
{CAUTION:
This light indicates that oil is not going through the engine
quickly enough to keep it lubricated. The engine could
be low on oil or could have some other oil problem.
Have it fixed right away.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
The oil light could also come on in the following
situations:
• The light will come on briefly when the ignition
is turned on to show that it is working properly.
If it does not come on with the ignition on,
there may be a problem with the fuse or bulb.
Have it fixed right away.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.
• Sometimes when the engine is idling at a stop,
a chime will sound and the light may blink on
and off. This is normal.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
on page 2-22.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamp Light
Cruise Control Light
The fog lamp light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
Lights On Reminder
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
information.
for more information.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All of the following situations are normal and do not
indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:
Fuel Gage
• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
The fuel gage shows
approximately how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.
It works only when
• The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly
or accelerate quickly.
the engine is on.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated that the tank was half full, but
it actually took a little more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
If the fuel supply gets low, the “FUEL LEVEL LOW”
message will appear on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) and a single chime will sound. See DIC Warnings
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the sport mode is active, an S will appear next
to the shift position indicator on the center of the
DIC display. When the manual mode is active, an M
will appear on the DIC display. When the normal mode
is active, only the shift position indicator will appear.
While the Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature is active,
the DIC will change to show the selected gear.
See “Driver Shift Control (DSC)” under Automatic
information.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the
status of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is
also used to display warning/status messages. All
messages will appear in the DIC display located at the
bottom of the instrument panel cluster, below the
tachometer and speedometer. The DIC buttons are
located on the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering wheel.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Be sure to take any message that
appears on the display seriously and remember that
clearing the message will only make the message
disappear, not correct the problem.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the current driver and the
information that was last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
The top line of the DIC display shows the vehicle
system information and the warning/status messages.
The bottom line of the DIC display shows either the
odometer, the trip odometer A or the trip odometer B
information on the left side. Only one odometer
can appear at a time. See “Trip Information” under DIC
on changing the display to show the odometer or
trip odometer information. The bottom line of the DIC
display also shows the outside temperature on the right
side and the shift lever position indicator in the center.
for more information on the shift lever positions.
DIC Operation and Displays
The Driver Information Center (DIC) has different modes
which can be accessed by pressing the four DIC buttons
located on the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering wheel.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have an STS-V, the DIC also has additional
vehicle information displays which include engine boost,
engine oil temperature, oil pressure, and transmission
fluid temperature.
DIC Buttons (Base Level)
If your vehicle does
not have a Head-Up
Display (HUD), these
are the buttons for
the DIC.
See “MPH (km)” later in this section for more information
on the digital speed display.
AB 3 00 (Trip Information): Press the top of this
button to scroll through the odometer, trip odometer A
and trip odometer B. Press and hold the bottom of
this button to reset each trip odometer back to zero.
4// (Reset): Press this button to reset certain DIC
features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages
and clear them from the DIC display.
EM (English/Metric): Press this button to change
the display from English to metric.
«4ª(Information): Press the top or bottom of this
button to scroll through the available vehicle information
displays which include digital speed display, if your
vehicle has this feature, fuel range, fuel economy,
fuel used, average speed, timer, battery voltage,
tire pressure, and engine oil life, if your vehicle has
this feature.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Buttons (Uplevel)
«~ª (Head-Up Display): Press this button to
change the position of the HUD on the windshield.
Press the top part of the button to move the HUD image
up. Press the bottom part of the button to move the
HUD image down.
If your vehicle has
a HUD, these are the
buttons for the DIC.
To adjust the brightness of the HUD image, see
For information on adjusting the instrument panel
brightness, see Instrument Panel Brightness
on page 3-41.
4// (Reset): Press this button to reset certain DIC
features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages
and clear them from the DIC display.
3 (Trip Information): Press this button to scroll
through the odometer, trip odometer A and trip
odometer B. To reset each trip odometer, either press
the reset button or press and hold the trip information
button until the trip odometer displayed returns to zero.
«4ª(Information): Press the top or bottom of this
button to scroll through the available vehicle information
displays which include digital speed display, if your
vehicle has this feature, fuel range, fuel economy,
fuel used, average speed, timer, battery voltage, tire
pressure, engine oil life, if your vehicle has this feature,
and display units. See “MPH (km)” later in this section
for more information on the digital speed display.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MPG AVG (L/100 km AVG)
Information Display Menu Items
This display shows the approximate average miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based on the number of
mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this display
was reset. To reset MPG AVG, press the reset button.
The display will return to zero.
The following display menu items can be displayed
by pressing the information button.
MPH (km/h)
If your vehicle has this display, it shows the vehicle’s
speed digitally in either miles per hour (mph) or
kilometers per hour (km/h).
MPG INST (L/100 km INST)
MILES RANGE (km RANGE)
This display shows the current fuel economy. This
number reflects only the fuel economy that the vehicle
has right now and will change frequently as driving
conditions change. Unlike average fuel economy,
this display cannot be reset.
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) you can drive
without refilling the fuel tank. This estimate is based
on the current driving conditions and will change if
the driving conditions change. For example, if you are
driving in traffic making frequent stops, the display
may read one number, but if you enter the freeway,
the number may change even though you still have the
same amount of fuel in the fuel tank. This is because
different driving conditions produce different fuel
economies. Generally, freeway driving produces better
fuel economy than city driving.
GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED)
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this display.
To reset GAL FUEL USED, press the reset button.
The display will return to zero.
AVG MPH (AVG km/h)
This display shows the average speed of the vehicle
in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
This average is calculated based on the various vehicle
speeds recorded since the last reset of this display.
To reset AVG MPH, press the reset button.
Once the range drops below about 40 miles (64 km)
remaining, the display will show LOW RANGE.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the Fuel Level Low
message will be displayed. See “Fuel Level Low”
for more information.
The display will return to zero.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIMER OFF
Tire Pressure
This display can be used like a stopwatch. You can
record the time it takes to travel from one point to
another. To access the timer, press the information
button until 00:00:00 TIMER OFF displays. To turn
on the timer, press the reset button until TIMER
ON displays. The timer will then start. To turn off
the timer, press the reset button again until TIMER OFF
displays. The timer will stop and display the end
timing value. To reset the timer, press and hold
the reset button after the timer has been stopped.
The display will return to zero.
This display shows the pressure for each tire in either
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). If the
tire pressure is normal, the value will display. If the tire
pressure is low or high, LOW or HIGH will appear on
the display with the value. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
page 3-80 for more information. Press the information
button to scroll through the following displays:
LF TIRE: This display shows the pressure in the driver
side front tire.
RF TIRE: This display shows the pressure in the
passenger side front tire.
BATTERY VOLTS
This display shows the current battery voltage. If the
voltage is in the normal range, the value will display. For
example, the display may read 13.2 BATTERY VOLTS.
If the voltage is low, the display will have LOW after it.
If the voltage is high, the display will have HIGH after it.
Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage based
on the state of the battery. The battery voltage may
fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.
for more information.
LR TIRE: This display shows the pressure in the driver
side rear tire.
RR TIRE: This display shows the pressure in the
passenger side rear tire.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of
a value, there may be a problem with your vehicle.
If this consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer
for service.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
the DIC may display a message. See DIC Warnings and
on page 3-42 for more information.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE OIL LIFE
Blank Line
If your vehicle has this display, it shows the estimated
oil life remaining. If you see 99% ENGINE OIL LIFE
on the display, that means that 99% of the current oil
life remains.
This display shows no information.
ENGINE BOOST (STS-V Only)
This display shows a graphic that indicates the amount
of boost the engine is receiving in either pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message will appear on the display. Change
the oil as soon as possible. In addition to the engine oil
life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance
is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (STS-V Only)
This display shows the engine oil temperature in
either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
OIL PRESSURE (STS-V Only)
After an oil change, reset the ENGINE OIL LIFE display.
The display will show 100% ENGINE OIL LIFE after
it has been reset. Also clear the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message from the display.
This display shows the oil pressure in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
TRANS (Transmission) FLUID TEMP
(Temperature) (STS-V Only)
ENGLISH DISPLAY UNITS
(METRIC DISPLAY UNITS)
This display shows the transmission fluid temperature in
either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
This display allows you to select between English and
metric units of measurement if your vehicle has the
uplevel DIC. Press the reset button to switch between
English and metric units.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trip Information Display Menu Items
DIC Warnings and Messages
The following display menu items can be displayed
by pressing the trip Information button.
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct
the condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
Odometer
Press the trip information button until the odometer
appears on the DIC display. The odometer shows the
total distance the vehicle has been driven in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
The text messages are the same for both the base
audio and Navigation systems unless otherwise
indicated.
Trip Odometer
Some messages may not require immediate action,
but you can press the reset button to acknowledge that
you received the messages and to clear them from
the display.
Press the trip information button until trip odometer A or B
appears on the DIC display. The trip odometer shows
the current distance traveled since the last reset for each
trip odometer in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
Both odometers can be used at the same time.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared. Take any
messages that appear on the display seriously
and remember that clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
For base level vehicles, each trip odometer can be
reset to zero separately by pressing and holding
the bottom of the trip information button while the
desired trip odometer is displayed. For uplevel vehicles,
reset each trip odometer by pressing the reset
button or by pressing and holding the trip information
button while the desired trip odometer is displayed.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message displays when a problem with the
charging system has been detected. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
more information.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ON
This message displays when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
level. The battery saver system starts reducing
certain features of the vehicle that may be noticeable.
At the point that the features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to
save the charge in the battery.
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
more information.
BATTERY NOT CHARGING SERVICE
CHARGING SYS (System)
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the
battery to recharge.
This symbol appears
with this message.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
To monitor battery voltage on the DIC, press the
information button until BATTERY VOLTS displays.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
This symbol appears
with this message.
This symbol appears
with this message.
This message displays when the electrical system is
charging less than 10 volts or the battery has been
drained.
This message displays when the electrical charging
system is overcharging the battery. When the system
detects that the battery voltage is above an estimated
16 volts, this message displays.
If this message appears immediately after starting the
engine, it is possible that the generator can still recharge
the battery. The battery should recharge while driving,
but may take a few hours to do so. Consider using
an auxiliary charger to boost the battery after returning
home or to a final destination. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.
To reduce the charging overload, use the vehicle’s
accessories:
• Turn on the exterior lamps and radio.
• Set the climate control on AUTO and the
fan speed on the highest setting.
If this message appears while driving or after starting
your vehicle and stays on, have it checked immediately
to determine the cause of this problem.
• Turn the rear window defogger on.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts
when the engine is running. To monitor battery
voltage on the DIC, press the information button until
BATTERY VOLTS displays.
To help the generator recharge the battery quickly,
reduce the load on the electrical system by turning off
the accessories.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
To monitor battery voltage on the DIC, press the
information button until BATTERY VOLTS displays.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
This message displays when the engine oil needs to be
more information.
This message displays when the pressure in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. If a tire
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon
as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set
to those shown on the Tire Loading Information
The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See
pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning light
After resetting the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message by clearing it from the display, reset the engine
oil life system separately. For more information on
resetting the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life
CHECK BRAKE FLUID
CHECK WASHER FLUID
This message displays if the ignition is on to inform the
driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have the brake
system serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as
for more information.
This symbol appears
with this message.
CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays when the fuel cap has not been
fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to ensure that it
is on and tightened properly.
This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir
as soon as possible. See Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-40 for more information.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEAN RADAR
COMPETITIVE DRIVING (STS-V Only)
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control system is disabled because the radar is blocked
and cannot detect vehicles in your path. It may also
activate during heavy rain or due to road spray.
To clean the system, see “Cleaning the System”
This message displays when the competitive driving
mode is turned on with the TC (traction control) button.
The TC (traction control) light comes on when the
competitive driving mode is on. The Traction Control
System (TCS) will not operate while in competitive
driving mode. Adjust your driving accordingly. See
more information.
CLEAN SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this message displays when the SBZA system
is disabled because the sensor is blocked and cannot
detect vehicles in your blind zone. The sensor may
be blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush. This
message may also display during heavy rain or due
to road spray. Your vehicle does not need service.
For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle
on page 5-110. See the Index in the Navigation
manual for more information.
This symbol appears
with this message.
This message displays when the driver door is not closed
completely. Make sure that the door is closed completely.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT IDLE ENGINE
ENGINE HOT – AC
(Air Conditioning) OFF
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed
above normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-29 for more information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal,
the air conditioning compressor turns back on.
You can continue to drive your vehicle.
This symbol appears
with this message.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
for more information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle
to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
This message displays when the engine has overheated.
Immediately look for a safe place to pull your vehicle
over and turn the engine off right away to avoid severe
on page 5-31. A chime also sounds when this message
is displayed.
on page 5-31 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You may notice the vehicle upshifting early or reduced
speeds while this message is displayed. When the
engine oil returns to a safe operating temperature, this
message clears from the DIC and the vehicle returns
to normal operation. Your vehicle does not require
service when this message is displayed.
ENGINE POWER REDUCED
This message displays when the engine power is
being reduced to protect the engine from damage.
There could be several malfunctions that might cause
this message. Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed to
your destination. The performance may be reduced
the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may
be driven at a reduced speed while this message
is on, but acceleration and speed may be reduced.
Anytime this message stays on, take the vehicle to
your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This symbol appears
with this message.
ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCED
RPM’S (Revolutions Per Minute)
This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel
level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
This message displays when your vehicle is in an
overheated engine operating mode. If this message
appears, the vehicle has determined that continued
operation at the existing engine speed may lead
to engine overheating. The vehicle automatically
limits engine RPMs to prevent engine overheating.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOOD AJAR
LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE
This symbol appears
with this message.
If your vehicle has the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
system, this message may display if the LDW system
does not activate due to a temporary condition. See the
Index in the Navigation manual for more information.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
This symbol appears
with this message.
This message displays when the hood is not closed
completely. Make sure that the hood is closed
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
This message displays when the driver side rear door
is not closed completely. Make sure that the door
is closed completely.
KEY FOB BATTERY LOW
This message displays when the battery in the keyless
access transmitter is low. Replace the battery in the
transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under Keyless
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If moving the transmitter
to different locations
within the vehicle does not
help, place the transmitter
in the center console
transmitter pocket with
the buttons facing
NO FOBS DETECTED
This message displays if the vehicle does not detect
the presence of a keyless access transmitter when you
have attempted to start the vehicle or a vehicle door
has just closed. The following conditions may cause
this message to appear:
forward and then press
the START button.
• Driver-added equipment plugged into the accessory
power outlet on the center console is causing
interference. Examples of these devices are cell
phones and cell phone chargers, two-way radios,
power inverters, or similar items. Try moving
the keyless access transmitter away from these
devices when starting the vehicle. In addition,
PDA devices and remote garage and gate openers
may also generate Electromagnetic Interference
(EMI) that may interfere with the keyless access
transmitter. Do not carry the keyless access
transmitter in the same pocket or bag as these
devices.
• The vehicle’s battery voltage is low. The battery
voltage must be above 10 volts for the keyless
access transmitter to be detected properly.
NO FOB OFF OR RUN?
This message displays when the keyless access
transmitter is not detected inside the vehicle while
you are trying to turn the ignition off. Your vehicle may
be near a strong radio antenna signal causing the
keyless access system to be jammed. The vehicle
remains in ACCESSORY until OFF or START has
been pressed or 10 minutes has expired. If you turn the
ignition off and you cannot find the keyless access
transmitter, you will not be able to restart the vehicle.
• The vehicle is experiencing Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI). Some locations, such as
airports, automatic toll booths, and some gas
stations, have EMI fields which may interfere
with the keyless access transmitter.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The keyless access transmitter needs to be inside of
the vehicle in order for the vehicle to start. See Starting
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
This symbol appears
with this message.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
This message displays when the passenger side front
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door
is closed completely.
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
oil pressure is low.
PRESS START AND BRAKE TO
START ENGINE
A multiple chime sounds when this message is
information.
This message displays when you need to press down
on the brake pedal while pressing the start button on
the electronic keyless ignition when trying to start
more information.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure.
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible when this message is displayed.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message displays when the passenger side rear
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door
is closed completely.
RADAR CRUISE NOT READY
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise Control
system is not activating due to a temporary condition.
Your vehicle does not require service. This message also
displays when either of the following conditions occur:
SERVICE AC (Air Conditioning)
SYSTEM
• The driver turns off the head-up display (HUD)
while the Adaptive Cruise Control is engaged.
This message displays when the electronic sensors that
control the air conditioning and heating systems are
no longer working. Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer/retailer if a drop in heating and
air conditioning efficiency is noticeable.
• The driver attempts to engage the Adaptive Cruise
Control while the HUD is off.
If this message appears when attempting to activate the
system, continue driving for several minutes and then
try activating the system again.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-60 for more information.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
This symbol appears
with this message.
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
This message displays when a problem with the panic
brake assist system has been detected. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM
SERVICE STABILITY SYS (System)
If your vehicle has the Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) system, this message may display to
indicate that the LDW system is not working properly.
If this message remains on after continued driving,
the system needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
See the Index in the Navigation manual for more
information.
Your vehicle has a vehicle stability enhancement system
called StabiliTrak®. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle
with the Active Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak®
option have a stability enhancement system called
Enhanced StabiliTrak®.
This message displays if there has been a problem
detected with the stability system.
SERVICE RADAR CRUISE
If this message comes on while driving, pull off the road
as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try resetting
the system by turning the ignition off then back on. If this
message still stays on or comes back on again while
driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the stability
system inspected by your dealer/retailer as soon
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control system is disabled and needs service.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system and this message displays, both SBZA
displays will remain on indicating there is a problem
with the SBZA system. If these displays remain on
after continued driving, the system needs service.
See your dealer/retailer. See the Index in the
Navigation manual for more information.
For vehicles with the Active Steering with Enhanced
StabiliTrak® option, in some cases when the SERVICE
STABILITY SYS message is displayed, a larger
degree of steering wheel input at low vehicle speeds
and a smaller degree of steering wheel input at higher
vehicle speeds may be required.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the Active Steering system needs service, the system
may be operating in the Stability Secure Mode and
the STABILITY SECURE MODE message will display.
SERVICE STEERING SYS (System)
Your vehicle has a speed variable assist steering
system. Your All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle may
have the Active Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak®
page 4-13.
When certain steering faults are present, the vehicle
speed may be limited. If vehicle speed is limited,
the SPEED LIMITED TO XXX message will display.
This message displays if a problem is detected with
the speed variable assist steering system or the
Active Steering system. When this message is
displayed, you may notice that the effort required to
steer the vehicle increases or feels heavier, but you
will still be able to steer the vehicle. See Steering
on page 4-13 for more information. Have the steering
system inspected by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible.
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS (System)
This message displays when the suspension system
is not operating properly. Have your vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
If your All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle has the Active
Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak® option and
the suspension system needs service, the Enhanced
StabiliTrak® system may be operating in the Stability
Secure Mode and the STABILITY SECURE MODE
on page 4-9.
If the SERVICE STEERING SYS message appears
because the Active Steering system needs service,
normal power steering is still operational. However,
compared to Active Steering, normal power steering
requires a larger degree of steering wheel input at
low vehicle speeds and a smaller degree of steering
wheel input at high vehicle speeds. The center position
of the steering wheel may be different. You may
continue to drive your vehicle with normal power
steering, but have the steering system inspected by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
page 3-67. Several conditions may cause this message
page 5-70 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM OFF
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this message displays when the SBZA system
has been turned off. See the Index in the Navigation
for more information.
SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with
the hood open and closed switches. The switches may
need to be replaced. When this message is displayed,
the theft-deterrent system will still be protecting the
interior of the vehicle, however, the hood area will not
be protected at this time. Also, the remote start function
will not work when this message appears. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX
This message displays when the vehicle speed is
limited to XXX, mph in English mode and km/h in
Metric mode, because the vehicle detects a problem
in the steering, stability control, or suspension system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays when there is a problem with
the transmission. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STABILITY COMPETITIVE MODE
STABILITY SYS (System) ACTIVE
If your All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle has the
Active Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak® option,
this message displays when the Competitive Mode
for stability control has been turned on using the
on page 4-9. When the Enhanced StabiliTrak®
Competitive Mode has been activated, traction control
operates in competitive mode and cannot be turned
off. Also, the Active Steering and the Magnetic
Ride Control systems operate in the Performance
Mode. For more information, see “Active Steering
and Magnetic Ride Control” in the Index in the
Navigation manual.
This message displays any time the StabiliTrak® system
or Enhanced StabiliTrak® system is actively assisting
with directional control of the vehicle. Slippery road
conditions may exist when this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. This message
may stay on for a few seconds after StabiliTrak®
stops assisting with directional control of the vehicle.
STABILITY SYS (System) NOT READY
This message displays if the StabiliTrak® system is
not ready. Two conditions may cause this message
to display:
• The vehicle needs to be driven in a straight line
until the sensors are centered. Once the sensors
are centered, the StabiliTrak® system is ready and
the STABILITY SYS READY message displays.
• The system needs to warm up. This may occur
when first starting your vehicle and driving away
during cold winter weather. This is normal. To
acknowledge this message, press the reset button.
The StabiliTrak® performance is affected until the
STABILITY SYS READY message is displayed in the
information.
STABILITY SECURE MODE
If your All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle has the
Active Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak® option,
this message displays when the stability control system
is in the secure mode. Stability Secure Mode is set
automatically when certain system faults or vehicle
conditions are detected. When the Stability Secure
Mode is activated, the stability control system will
not respond to driver requests to change the stability
mode until the next ignition cycle or until the vehicle
condition or fault is returned to normal. See Enhanced
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STABILITY SYS (System) OFF
STABILITY TOURING MODE
This message displays any time StabiliTrak® or
If your All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle has the
Active Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak® option,
this message displays when the Stability Touring
Mode is re-activated by using the traction control
button after:
Enhanced StabiliTrak® is turned off using the TC
(traction control) on/off button. See Traction Control
and Traction Control Mode Selection” under Enhanced
this message has been displayed, StabiliTrak® or
Enhanced StabiliTrak® is no longer available to assist
with directional control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving
• Driving in the Stability Competitive Mode.
• The stability control system is turned off
by the driver.
This message may also display after exiting
STABILITY SECURE MODE when certain system
faults or vehicle conditions have been cleared.
STABILITY SYS (System) READY
This message displays any time StabiliTrak® is turned
back on using the TC (traction control) on/off button.
for more information. When this message has been
displayed, StabiliTrak® is ready to assist with directional
STARTING DISABLED THEFT
PROBLEM
This message displays when incorrect conditions
exist within the theft-deterrent system. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING DISABLED THROTTLE
PROBLEM
TRACTION ACTIVE
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery
road conditions may exist if this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. The message
stays on for a few seconds after the TCS stops limiting
wheel spin. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-6 for more information.
This message displays when your vehicle’s throttle
system is not functioning properly. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This symbol appears
with this message.
TRANS (Transmission) HOT IDLE
ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed
on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead
to costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while the
transmission temperature warning is displayed.
This message displays if the theft-deterrent system
has detected a break-in attempt while you were away
from your vehicle.
This message displays when the transmission fluid
in your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow
it to idle until the transmission cools down or until
this message is removed.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRUNK OPEN
Other Messages
Here are more messages that you can receive on your
Driver Information Center (DIC). To acknowledge a
message and read another message that may have
come on at the same time, press the reset button.
This symbol appears
with this message.
• ACCESSORY ACTIVE
• KNOWN FOB
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely.
• MAX # FOBS LEARNED
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
TURN SIGNAL ON
• OFF/ACC (Accessory) TO LEARN
This message displays and a chime sounds if a
turn signal is left on for about 1 mile (1.6 km).
Turn off the turn signal.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
• READY FOR FOB X
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
• SHIFT TO PARK
• WAIT XX MIN (Minutes)
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While your vehicle is parked:
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself with
its features.
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound equipment
can be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other
systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s
systems may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Date
Setting the Time
1. Press the w knob (the passenger side knob)
1. Press the w (tune/select) knob (the passenger
to enter the main menu.
side knob) to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the same knob until SET DATE displays.
3. Press this knob to select SET DATE.
4. Turn this knob to adjust the date.
2. Turn the same knob until SET CLOCK displays.
3. Press this knob to select SET CLOCK.
4. Turn this knob to adjust the time.
5. Press the same knob to update the time.
VEHICLE DATE UPDATED displays.
5. Press the same knob to update the time.
VEHICLE TIME UPDATED displays.
If the DATE is programmed into one of the configurable
keys, pressing the key switches the display back to
the date set function. The time and date always appears
on the radio display. See “Configurable Radio Display
Keys” later in this section for more information on
configuring the keys.
If the CLOCK/RADIO DISP (display) is programmed
into one of the configurable keys, pressing the key
switches the display back to the clock set function.
The time and date always appears on the radio display.
See “Configurable Radio Display Keys” later in this
section for more information on configuring the keys.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Radio(s) (MP3)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
Radio with CD shown, Radio with
Six-Disc CD similar
This system relies upon receiving specific information,
when available, from these stations. In rare cases,
a radio station can broadcast incorrect information
that causes the radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters display instead of the frequency.
RDS stations can also provide the time of day,
a program type (PTY) for current programming,
and the name of the program being broadcast.
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing the Radio
©¨ (Scan): Press the arrows to enter scan mode.
SCAN displays. Press the arrows to scan the next
station. The radio goes to a station, plays for
five seconds, then goes to the next station. Press
the arrows again to stop scanning.
O (Power): Press to turn the system on and off.
n (Volume): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or to decrease the volume.
To scan preset stations, press and hold the arrows for
more than two seconds until a beep sounds and PSCAN
displays. The radio goes to the first preset station,
plays for five seconds, then goes to the next preset
station. Press the arrows again to stop scanning presets.
SRCE (Source): Press to select a source, either radio
or CD. The CD must be loaded to select the source
and to play. CD displays if a CD is loaded. If a CD is
not loaded, the display does not change from the
radio source.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
Finding a Station
AF (Alternate Frequency): This feature lets you turn
the Alternate Frequency feature on or off. See Alternate
Frequency under, “Activating Program Type (PTY)
Stations” later in this section for more information.
BAND: Press to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2 (if equipped).
w (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
A LOCAL/DISTANT Selection: With this feature the
radio can be set to search for local stations or stations
that are further away for a larger selection.
© ¨(Seek): Press the left arrow to go to the
previous station and stay there. Press the right arrow
to go to the next station and stay there. The sound
mutes while seeking.
The radio seeks stations only with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set this feature to LOCAL or DISTANT, perform the
following steps:
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn this knob until SEEK LOCAL or SEEK
DISTANT displays.
3. Press the same knob to select either LOCAL
or DISTANT.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM, or XM1
or XM2.
To search for stations, press either © ¨ seek arrow.
If the system is set to LOCAL, SEEK displays and
seeks to stations only with strong signals. If the system
is set to DISTANT, D-SEEK displays and seeks to
stations with weak and strong signals.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
for two seconds until a beep sounds. The set preset
station number displays above the set pushbutton.
When that numbered pushbutton is pressed for less
than two seconds, the station that was set, returns.
This feature does not function with the XM™ radio
stations.
4 (Information): Press this button while in XM mode
to retrieve three different categories of information
related to the current song or channel: Artist, Song Title,
Category or PTY. To view this information, perform
the following:
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To set the preset stations with an equalization
setting, DSP setting, or a PTY (program type) setting,
see each of these features later in this section.
When a preset station is selected, once one of these
additional settings is selected, the preset station
remembers each setting and it remains active, until
the setting is selected off for that preset station.
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn this knob until INFO displays.
3. Press the same knob to select INFO. The display
changes to show the additional XM™ information.
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOSTORE PRESETS: To set the preset stations
automatically, perform the following steps:
PRESETS HOME/AWAY: This feature stores two
different kinds of station presets. HOME can be used for
local stations and AWAY for stations outside of the
local broadcasting area. To set preset stations for home
and away perform the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
4. Turn this knob until AUTOSTORE PRESETS
displays.
2. Turn this knob until PRESETS HOME/AWAY
displays.
5. Press the same knob to select. AUTOSTORE
displays. The radio automatically searches the band
and selects and stores the six radio stations with the
strongest signal. The stations are stored by signal
strength, not sequential order. The set preset station
number displays above the set pushbutton. When
that numbered pushbutton is pressed for less than
two seconds, the station that was set, returns.
3. Press the same knob to select. HOME or AWAY
displays.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display.
To return to the original display, repeatedly press
the BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to
time out.
This feature does not function with the XM™ radio
stations.
6. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
Follow the manual or automatic steps previously
listed for setting the preset pushbuttons for both home
and away.
This feature does not function with the XM™ radio
stations.
The radio presets do not have to be reset when the
vehicle is started, or when the battery power is removed.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble, perform the
following steps:
The equalization settings are preset to EQ0 (Normal),
EQ1 (Pop), EQ2 (Rock), EQ3 (Jazz), EQ4 (Talk),
and EQ5 (Country).
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
2. Press this knob to scroll through the settings.
3. Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the bass,
midrange, or treble. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
To adjust the balance or fade, perform the following
steps:
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn this knob until BASS-MID-TREBLE displays.
3. Press the same knob to enter the tone settings.
4. Press this knob to scroll to BALANCE or FADER.
4. Press the same knob to set the adjustment.
5. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
5. Turn this knob to adjust the BALANCE to the right or
the left speakers and the FADER to the front or the
rear speakers.
AUDIO EQUALIZER: This feature lets you select
customized equalization settings. To choose an
equalization setting (EQ0 through EQ5), perform the
following steps:
6. Press the same knob to set the adjustment.
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
7. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
2. Turn this knob until EQUALIZER displays.
3. Press the same knob to set the equalization setting.
The equalization setting displays.
EQ0 does not display while in this mode.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To display the last message, perform the following
steps:
RDS Messages
ALERT: Alert warns of local and national emergencies.
When, an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station or a related network station, ALERT
displays. You will hear the announcement, even if the
volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play
stops during the announcement. Alert announcements
cannot be turned off. If the radio tunes to a related
network station for the announcement, it returns to the
original station when the announcement is finished.
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn this knob until RECALL RDS MESSAGE
displays.
3. Press the same knob and the message displays.
Once the message displays, MSG disappears from the
display until another new message is received.
TP (Traffic Program): TP displays when the radio
detects a signal from an RDS station that has traffic
announcement broadcast capability.
ALERT is not affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by all
RDS stations.
TA (Traffic Announcement): If TA displays, the tuned
radio station broadcasts traffic announcements, and
when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned
station, you will hear it.
MSG (Message): If the current RDS station has a
message, MSG displays. The message can display the
artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc. If the
entire message does not display, parts of the message
displays every three seconds until the message is
complete. Once the completed message has displayed,
MSG disappears from the display until another new
message is received.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
when TA is turned on it seeks to a station that does.
When a station that broadcasts traffic announcements is
found, the radio stops seeking and TA displays. If no
station is found that broadcasts traffic announcements,
No Traffic displays.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The radio plays traffic announcements if the volume is
low. The radio interrupts the play of a CD if the last
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
Once program type is activated the PTYs display
above the pushbuttons, in place of the preset stations
(if programmed). Press the pushbutton for the
desired PTY. Not all stations support PTYs. The radio
might not go to all of the stations with that music
type when pressing the pushbutton.
To turn TA on or off, perform the following steps:
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn this knob until TRAFFIC ANNOUNCE displays.
3. Press the same knob to select ON or OFF.
An X appears in the box when ON is selected.
AF (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency lets
the radio switch to a stronger station with the same
program type.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
To turn AF on or off, perform the following steps:
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn this knob until ALTERNATE FREQ. displays.
Activating Program Type (PTY)
Stations (RDS and XM™)
PTY lets you search for stations with specific types of
music. The selectable PTYs are POP, EASY, TALK,
CNTRY (Country), CLASS (Classical), and JAZZ.
3. Press the same knob to select AF OFF, AF ON,
or AF REG. An X appears in the box when ON is
selected.
To activate program types, perform the following steps:
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn this knob until PROGRAM TYPE MODE
displays.
This feature does not function with the XM™ radio
stations.
3. Press the same knob to select ON or OFF.
An X appears in the box when ON is selected.
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Message
Using the Single CD Player
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in. If the ignition and the radio are on,
the CD begins playing. A CD can be loaded with
the radio off, but it does not start playing until the
radio is on.
THEFTLOCK: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has been activated. Take
the vehicle to the dealer/retailer for service.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. While the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During
your trial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimited
access to XM™ Radio Online for when you are not
in your vehicle. A service fee is required to receive
the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™
at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the
U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677
in Canada.
When the CD is inserted, CD displays. As each new
track starts to play, the track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
When a CD is inserted, the CD functions display
above the pushbuttons, in place of the preset stations
(if programmed).
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
F1 { (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse quickly
within a track. Release to play the passage. The elapsed
time of the track displays.
this section for further detail.
F2 | (Forward): Press and hold to advance quickly
within a track. Release to play the passage. The elapsed
time of the track displays.
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F3 RDM (Random): Press to listen to the tracks in
random, rather than sequential, order. RANDOM
displays. Press again to turn off random play.
RANDOM disappears from the display.
Using the Six-Disc CD Changer
M (Load): Press to load CDs into the CD player.
This CD player holds up to six CDs.
F4 RPT (Repeat): Press to hear a track over again.
REPEAT displays. Press again to turn off repeat
play. REPEAT disappears from the display.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
2. Press and release the load button.
Please Wait displays.
3. Load the CD, when INSERT displays, insert
a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls the CD in.
F6 DISP (Display): Press to display the time of the
track. Press again to remove the time of the track from
the display.
©¨ (Seek): Press the left arrow to go to the previous
or press the right arrow button to go to the next track
on the CD.
When a CD is inserted, CD displays and the number of
the CD and the track number displays if the radio is on.
If the radio is on, the CD begins to play automatically.
©¨ (Scan): Press the arrows to listen to each track
for 10 seconds. The CD goes to a track, plays for
10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Press the
arrows again to stop scanning.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
2. Press and hold the load button for two seconds.
Please Wait displays and a beep sounds.
3. Load the CD, when INSERT displays, insert
a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls the CD in.
SRCE (Source): Press to select a source, either radio or
CD. The CD must be loaded to select the source and to
play. CD displays if a CD is loaded. If a CD is not loaded,
the display does not change from the radio source.
Do not load a CD until INSERT displays. The CD
player takes up to six CDs. If you want to load less
than six CDs, load the desired amount. The CD
player times out when it does not receive any more
CDs and the last CD loaded begins to play.
Z (Eject): Press to stop a CD when it is playing
or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject can
be activated with the ignition and the radio off.
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.
Care of Your CDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the
quality of the music that has been recorded, and the
way the CD-R has been handled. Handle them carefully.
Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The
CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the
surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole
and the outer edge.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD
player and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
If the radio is on, the last CD loaded begins to play
automatically.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
F1 DISCn(Down): Press to go to the previous CD.
F2 DISCm(Up): Press to go to the next CD.
F3 CD REV { (Reverse): Press to go to the previous
track. Press and hold to reverse quickly within the track.
Release to play the passage. The elapsed time of the
track displays.
Care of Your CD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top
of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
F4 CD FWD | (Forward): Press to go to the next
track. Press and hold to advance quickly within the track.
Release to play the passage. The elapsed time of the
track displays.
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F5 MODE: Press to select from NORMAL, RPT TRCK
(Repeat Track), RPT DISC (Repeat CD), RDM TRCK
(Random Track), and RDM ALL (Random All CDs).
• NORMAL: Sets the system for normal play of
the CD(s). NORMAL does not display while in
this mode.
F6 DISP (Display): Press to display the time of the
track. Press again to display CD PLAY MODE.
©¨(Seek): Press the left arrow to go to the previous
or press the right arrow button to go to the next track
on the CD.
• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats the track
over again. RPT TRCK displays. Press the
MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat play.
RPT TRCK disappears from the display.
©¨(Scan): Press the arrows to listen to each track
for 10 seconds. The CD goes to a track, plays for
10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Press the
arrows again to stop scanning.
• RPT DISC (Repeat CD): Repeats the CD over
again. RPT DISC displays. Press the MODE
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play.
RPT DISC disappears from the display.
• RDM TRCK (Random Track): Plays the tracks on
the current CD in random, rather than sequential,
order. RDM TRCK displays. Press the MODE
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
Z (Eject): Press to eject the CD that is currently
playing, or press and hold to eject all of the CDs loaded.
A beep sounds. Eject can be activated with the
ignition or radio off.
Playing an MP3 CD-R Disc
The vehicle’s radio system could have the MP3 feature.
If it has this feature, it is capable of playing an MP3
CD-R disc. For more information on how to play an MP3
this section.
RDM TRCK disappears from the display.
• RDM ALL (Random All CDs): Plays all of the CDs
loaded in random, rather than sequential, order.
RDM ALL displays. Press the MODE pushbutton
again to turn off random play. RDM ALL disappears
from the display.
3-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD Messages
Configurable Radio Display Keys
The four keys, located on each side of the radio display,
can be configured to make it easier to adjust the radio
features and other non-radio related features can also
be customized.
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• If it is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
To program the configurable radio display keys,
perform the following steps:
• If you are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn this knob until SETUP displays.
3. Press this knob to enter into SETUP.
4. Turn the same knob until CONFIGURE
DISPLAY KEYS displays.
5. Press this knob to enter into CONFIGURE
DISPLAY KEYS.
6. Turn this knob to select which of the four
configurable keys you would like to change.
The currently assigned feature displays.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• The format of the CD might not be compatible. See
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
7. Press the same knob to select the configurable
key to change.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
8. Turn this knob to find the feature that will be
stored to the key.
9. Press this knob when you have found the feature
to be stored. The display updates, by showing
the symbol of the feature selected next to the
configurable key.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
10. Repeat the previous steps for each configurable key.
3-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once a feature is programmed to a key, the feature
does not display when programming the remaining
configurable keys. The configurable keys can be
changed at any time.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using
one folder for each album. Each folder or album
should contain 18 songs or less.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3
disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually better to
burn the disc all at once.
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R Disc
MP3 Format
The player is able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file names, folder names, or playlist names
might use more disc memory space than necessary.
To conserve space on the disc, minimize the length
of the file, folder, or playlist names. You can also play
an MP3 CD that was recorded using no file folders.
The system can support up to 11 folders in depth,
though, keep the depth of the folders to a minimum
in order to keep down the complexity and confusion
in trying to locate a particular folder during playback.
If a CD contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player
lets you access and navigate up to the maximum,
but all items over the maximum are ignored.
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on one disc.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension,
other file extensions might not work.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
are available for display by the radio when recorded
using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
3-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Root Directory
Order of Play
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory are accessed prior to any root
directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
Tracks are played in the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Empty Directory or Folder
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
begins from the first track under the root directory.
When all tracks from the root directory have
played, play continues from files according to
their numerical listing. After playing the last track
from the last folder, play begins again at the
first track of the first folder or root directory.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file
structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder is
not displayed.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name. The new track
name displays.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions do not function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
File System and Naming
The song name that is displayed is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then go to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder the
radio displays ROOT.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
3-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preprogrammed Playlists
F2 [ (Next Folder): Press this button to go to the
first track in the next folder.
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Press and hold this button to advance quickly within a
track. Release this button to play the passage. FWD and
the elapsed time of the track displays.
Pressing this button while in folder random mode takes
you to the next folder and plays the tracks in that
folder in random order.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in, and LOADING CD displays. The CD
should begin playing and the CD symbol displays.
If the ignition and the radio are on, the CD begins
playing. A CD can be loaded with the radio off,
but it does not start playing until the radio is on.
F3 RDM (Random): To play the tracks on the CD in
random, rather than sequential order, press and release
this pushbutton until RDM TRCK displays. Once all
of the tracks in the current folder or playlist have played,
the system moves on to the next folder or playlist and
plays all of the tracks in random order.
F1 r(Previous Folder): Press this button to go
to the first track in the previous folder.
To play the tracks in the current folder in random, rather
than sequential order, press and release this button
until RDM FLDR displays. This feature does not work
with playlists.
Press and hold this button to reverse quickly within a
track. Release this button to play the passage. REV
and the elapsed time of the track displays.
While in random, pressing and releasing either
© ¨ seek arrow goes to the previous or to the
next random track.
Pressing this button while in folder random mode goes
to the previous folder and plays the tracks in that
folder in random order.
3-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press and release this pushbutton until NORMAL
displays to turn off random play.
w (Tune): Turning this knob fast tracks reverse or
advance through the tracks in all folders or playlists.
The track number and file name displays for each track.
Turning this knob while in random fast tracks reverse
or advances the tracks in sequential order.
F4 RPT (Repeat): To repeat the current track, press
and release this pushbutton until RPT TRCK displays.
To repeat the tracks in the current folder, press and
release this pushbutton until RPT FLDR displays.
4 (Information): Press this button, while an MP3 CD
is loaded, to view the Title, Artist, Album, or Folder
names. To view this information, perform the following:
Press and release this pushbutton until NORMAL
displays to turn off repeated play.
1. Press the w knob to enter the main menu.
F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton to switch
between the elapsed time of the track and the MP3
playback information.
2. Turn this knob until INFO displays.
3. Press the same knob to select INFO. The display
changes to show the additional MP3 information.
©¨ (Seek): Press the left seek arrow to go to the
start of the previous track. Press the right seek arrow to
go to the start of the next track. Pressing either seek
arrow for more than two seconds searches the previous
or next tracks at two tracks per second. Release the
seek arrows to stop searching and to play the track.
4. Press one of the following pushbuttons to view that
specific information.
• F1 TTLE (Title): Displays the title name.
• F2 ATST (Artist): Displays the artist name.
• F3 ALBM (Album): Displays the album name.
• F4 FLDR (Folder): Displays the folder name.
©¨ (Scan): Press the scan arrows to scan the
tracks in each folder. The radio goes to the next track,
plays for 10 seconds, then goes to the next track.
Press the scan arrows again to stop scanning.
5. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
3-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Title Info: No song title information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
No CAT Info: No category information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly,
but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM™ receiver in your vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle. For
security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped
between vehicles. If this message is received after having
your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel
is no longer assigned. Tune to another station.
If this station was one of the presets, choose another
station for that preset button.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
3-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If your vehicle has the Navigation system, see
the Navigation System manual supplied with
your vehicle for more information on accessing
the main menu and for descriptions of the menu
items for the Navigation system.
Navigation/Radio System
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The navigation system has built-in features intended
to minimize driver distraction. Technology alone,
no matter how advanced, can never replace your own
judgment. See the Navigation System manual for
some tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
The main menu for the Base audio system consists
of the following menu items:
• e BASS - MID - TREBLE
• x BALANCE - FADER
• e EQ EQUALIZER
Radio Personalization
Accessing the Radio’s Main Menu
(Base Audio System)
• H/A (HOME/AWAY) PRESETS
• AUTOSTORE PRESETS
• CAT CATEGORY
There are two different procedures for accessing the
radio’s main menu depending upon whether or not
your vehicle has the Navigation system.
• TA TRAFFIC ANNOUNCE
• RECALL RDS (Radio Data System) MESSAGE
• A SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT
• 8 SET CLOCK
To access the main menu of the radio, do one of
the following:
• Using the Base audio system, press the
CNFG button located on the radio or press
the w (tune) knob located on the right side
• B SET DATE
of the radio. Then turn the w knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to scroll through the
menu items.
• 4 INFO (Information)
• LANG LANGUAGE
• SETUP
3-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H/A (Home/Away) PRESETS: This menu item lets you
switch back and forth between your home and away
preset radio stations. See “Presets Home/Away” under
Radio Main Menu Item Descriptions
(Base Audio System)
The following descriptions are for the Base audio
system. For information pertaining to the Navigation
audio system, see “Audio System” in the Index of
the Navigation System manual supplied with your
vehicle.
AUTOSTORE PRESETS: This menu item lets
you automatically store radio stations with the strongest
signals as presets. See “Autostore Presets” under
e BASS - MID (Midrange) - TREBLE: This menu
item lets you adjust the levels for the bass, midrange
and treble features of the audio system. See “Setting
page 3-100 for more information.
CAT (Category): This menu item lets you select radio
stations based on preset categories. See “Activating
Program Type (PTY) Stations” under Radio(s) (MP3)
on page 3-100 for more information.
TA (Traffic Announcement): This menu item lets
you turn the TA feature on and off. See “TA (Traffic
for more information.
x BALANCE - FADER: This menu item lets you
adjust the levels for the balance and fader features
of the audio system. See “Adjusting the Speakers
for more information.
RECALL RDS MESSAGE: This menu item lets you
view an RDS radio station message broadcast by
a radio station. See “MSG (Message)” under Radio(s)
e EQ (Equalizer): This menu item lets you choose
among five preset equalizations for the audio system.
page 3-100 for more information.
3-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LANG (Language): To change the language displayed
on the radio, select LANGUAGE by pressing the
w knob. Turn the w knob to scroll through the
following available languages:
A SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT: This feature instructs the
audio system to seek only local radio stations with
the strongest signal or to seek all radio stations with
a strong signal in a large area. Use LOCAL while
in urban areas where there are several strong radio
station signals and you want to limit the number
of stations to those with the strongest signals only.
Use DISTANT while in rural areas where there are
fewer radio station signals available.
• ENGLISH
• GERMAN
• FRENCH
• SPANISH
• JAPANESE
See “Local/Distant Selection” under Radio(s) (MP3)
on page 3-100 for more information.
To make your selection, press the w knob.
If you accidentally select a language that you did not
want, ENGLISH is always at the top of the language list.
8 SET CLOCK: Use this menu item to set the time.
SETUP: When you select this menu item, the following
submenu is available:
B SET DATE: Use this menu item to set the date.
• PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU
• DRIVER SELECTION
4 (Information): This menu item is used to display
XM™ satellite radio service and CD MP3 playback
on page 3-100 for more information.
• DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS
• CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS
3-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more information on the DRIVER SELECTION
submenu item, see “Recalling Driver Settings”
and “Storing Driver Settings” under Memory Seat,
SETUP Submenu Items
The following choices are available for programming
using the Base audio system.
PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU
DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS
This item turns the entire list of personalization features
on or off. This item allows you to program certain
features to a preferred setting for up to two people.
The number of available features varies depending
upon which options are purchased. While this item is
on, a check mark appears after it. For more information
on the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU item, see
When you select this item, the following submenu
displays:
• RECALL EXIT SETTINGS
• STORE EXIT SETTINGS
For more information on the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS
submenu item, see “Recalling Exit Settings” and
“Storing Exit Settings” under Memory Seat, Mirrors
DRIVER SELECTION
When you select this item, the following submenu
displays:
CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS
(Base Audio System)
• DRIVER 1
This item lets you customize the functions of the
four configurable keys located to the left and right of the
audio display. See “Configurable Radio Display Keys”
information.
• DRIVER 2
• RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS
• STORE DRIVER SETTINGS
3-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does
not operate and LOC, LOCK, or LOCKED could display.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Standard Audio Steering
Wheel Controls and
Cruise Control Cancel
Audio Controls
With Heated Steering
Wheel and Cruise
Control Cancel
Your vehicle has audio steering wheel controls.
They could differ depending on your vehicle’s options.
There are three versions.
On the outboard side, you may have:
1. SEEK, SRCE (Source), SCAN, and Cruise
Control Cancel.
2. SEEK, SRCE, Heated Steering Wheel and
Cruise Control Cancel.
3. SRCE, Heated Steering Wheel, Adaptive Cruise
Control Gap, and Cruise Control Cancel.
The inboard side controls are the same for all versions.
3-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The radio seeks stations only with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
Press either SEEK arrow to go to the previous or the
next track while sourced to a CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped) and CD.
SCAN: To scan stations, press and hold this button for
a few seconds, the radio goes to a station, plays for
a few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
Audio Controls With
Heated Steering Wheel,
Adaptive Cruise
Right-Side Audio
Controls
The radio scans stations only with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
Control GAP, and
Cruise Control Cancel
yz (Previous/Next): Press the arrows to go to the
previous or the next radio station stored as a favorite.
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. See the following descriptions of the controls
that can adjusted.
While a CD is playing, press either arrow to go to
the previous or to the next track.
+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus volume
button to increase or to decrease the volume.
©SEEK ¨: Press the SEEK arrows to go to the
previous or the next radio station while in AM, FM,
or XM™ (if equipped).
3-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and release
this button to silence the vehicle speakers only.
The audio of the wireless and wired headphones, if your
vehicle has these features, does not mute. Press and
release this button again, to turn the sound on.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on your radio.
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press and
hold this button for longer than one second to initiate
voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the
Navigation System manual for more information.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold this
button for longer than one second to interact with the
OnStar® system. If your vehicle also has the navigation
system, press and hold this button for longer than
one second to initiate voice recognition and say “OnStar”
page 2-48 in this manual for more information.
FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals only
reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings
or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Radio Reception
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or through tunnels could cause loss
of the XM™ signal for a period of time. The radio
may display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug
the item from the accessory power outlet.
3-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If adding a cellular telephone to your vehicle, and the
antenna needs to be attached to the glass, make
sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM antenna are not
damaged. There is enough space between the grid lines
to attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering
with radio reception.
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the grid lines on the glass are not damaged.
If the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere
with radio reception.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window may damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear window defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp
objects.
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window
defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger
grid line has been damaged. If this is true, the grid line
must be repaired.
3-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who
has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver who will not
drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a
global tragedy.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and
road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every U.S.
state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between
hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster if you do
a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic
and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a
lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the
engine stops, you will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the
power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and
you might even notice that the brake pedal moves
a little. This is normal.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes if
that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light will
stay on. See Antilock
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might hear
the antilock pump or motor operate, and feel the
brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 3-65. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time. In
many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
The Traction Control System (TCS) automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
TCS off if you ever need to.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. On a rear-wheel-drive vehicle, the
system operates if it senses that one or both of the rear
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. On
an All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle, the system will
operate if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning
or beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system brakes the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduces
engine power to limit wheel spin.
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate
heavily when the TCS is off. You could damage your
vehicle’s driveline.
When the TCS is switched off on AWD and STS-V
vehicles, you may still feel the system working. This is
normal and necessary with the hardware on your
vehicle.
You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets
stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal.
using TCS when driving in snowy or icy conditions.
This warning light will
come on to let you know if
there is a problem with
your traction control
system.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn the system off,
press the TC (traction
control) button located
near the shift lever.
Competitive Driving Mode (STS-V)
The driver can select this optional handling mode
by pressing the Traction Control button, located near
the shift lever, twice within five seconds. Competitive
driving mode allows the driver to have control of
the power applied to the rear wheels, while the
StabiliTrak® system helps steer the vehicle by selective
brake application. In competitive mode, the levels at
which StabiliTrak® is engaged have been modified
to better suit a performance driving environment. When
the traction control warning light is on, the Traction
Control System will not be operating. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
If your All Wheel Drive vehicle has the optional
enhanced vehicle stability control system called Active
Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak®, the Traction
Control button is used to turn traction control on and off
and to select between three stability control modes:
Touring, Competitive and Off. See Enhanced
operating instructions.
When you press the Traction Control button again, the
Traction Control System will be on. The traction
engaged symbol will be displayed temporarily in the DIC
and a chime will be heard. See DIC Warnings and
If you press the TC button once, the Traction Control
System will turn off and the Traction Control System
Warning Light will come on. Press the TC button again
to turn the system back on. If you press and hold
the TC button for five seconds, the StabiliTrak® system
and the Traction Control System will turn off. Press
the TC button again to turn StabiliTrak® back on. For
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Magnetic Ride Control
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle may have Magnetic Ride Control that
automatically adjusts the ride of your vehicle. Automatic
ride control is achieved through a computer used to
control and monitor the suspension system. The
controller receives input from various sensors to
determine the proper system response. If the controller
detects a problem within the system, the DIC will
display a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message. See
information. See your dealer for service.
Your vehicle has a vehicle stability enhancement
system called StabiliTrak®. It is an advanced computer
controlled system that assists with directional control
of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
If your all-wheel-drive vehicle has the optional enhanced
vehicle stability control system called Active Steering
on page 4-9.
StabiliTrak® activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between the intended path and the direction
the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak® selectively
applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s
brakes to help steer the vehicle in the direction which
you are steering.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Your limited-slip rear axle can give you additional
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like
a standard axle most of the time, but when one of
the rear wheels has no traction and the other does, this
feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the
vehicle.
When the system activates, a STABILITY SYS ACTIVE
message will be displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-80. You may also hear a noise or feel
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to
steer the vehicle in the direction you want it to go.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak®, a
SERVICE STABILITY SYS message will be displayed
page 3-80. When this message is displayed, the system
is not operational. Driving should be adjusted
accordingly.
StabiliTrak® comes on automatically whenever the
vehicle is started. To help assist with directional control
of the vehicle, always leave the system on. StabiliTrak®
can be turned off, however, by using the TC (traction
control) on/off button. See Traction Control System
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the StabiliTrak®
activates, the cruise control will automatically disengage.
When road conditions allow you to safely use it again,
you may reengage the cruise control. See Cruise Control
more information.
During extreme cold temperature conditions, the active
steering function may be temporarily disabled which may
cause the steering wheel to be off set from the center
position while driving straight. This is normal operation
and the vehicle is safe to drive in these cases.
Stability control activates when the computer senses a
difference between the intended path and the direction
the vehicle is actually traveling. Stability control
automatically adjusts the front road wheel steering angle,
modifies the suspension stiffness, and selectively applies
braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s brakes to
help maintain directional control of the vehicle.
When the system activates, a STABILITY SYS ACTIVE
message displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
also hear a noise or feel vibration in the brake pedal. This
is normal. Continue to steer the vehicle in the direction
you want it to go.
Enhanced StabiliTrak®
All-wheel-drive (AWD) vehicles with the Active Steering
with Enhanced StabiliTrak® option have an enhanced
computer controlled vehicle stability system that assists
with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving
conditions. This system coordinates automatic control of
the Active Steering System, the Magnetic Ride Control
Suspension System, and the Brake Control System for
better vehicle performance.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when Enhanced
StabiliTrak® activates, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely use
it again, you may re-engage the cruise control. See
on page 3-20 for more information.
When the stability control Stability Competitive Mode
has been selected, the Active Steering and Magnetic
Ride Control Touring Mode is not available. These
systems are automatically changed to the Performance
Mode, providing more response to road conditions
and quicker steering response. For more information,
see “Active Steering and Magnetic Ride Control
Mode” in the Index of the vehicle’s Navigation Manual.
Enhanced StabiliTrak® comes on automatically in the
Stability Touring Mode, when the vehicle is started. The
Stability Touring Mode is recommended for normal
driving. Enhanced StabiliTrak® also has Stability
Competitive Mode that is turned on by pressing the
Traction Control (TC) Button. See Traction Control
used by the performance conscious driver who desires
less stabilty control intervention. See Competitive Driving
Competitive Mode has been activated, traction control
operates in competitive mode and cannot be turned off.
The STABILITY COMPETITIVE MODE message will be
displayed on the DIC. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-80.
To assist you with directional control of the vehicle,
always leave the system on. Stability control can
be turned off however, by using the traction control
The STABILITY SYS OFF message will be displayed
page 3-80.
If there is a problem detected with Enhanced
StabiliTrak®, the SERVICE STABILITY SYS message
will be displayed on the DIC. See DIC Warnings
displayed, the system is not operating. Driving should be
adjusted accordingly.
When operating your vehicle in the Stability Competitive
Mode, the system provides less stability control
intervention. Driving should be adjusted accordingly.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enhanced StabiliTrak® and Traction
Control Mode Selection
When certain faults or vehicle conditions are detected,
the Stability control will automatically go into a secure
mode and the STABILITY SECURE MODE message will
be displayed on the DIC. When the Stability Secure Mode
is activated, the stability control system will not respond
to driver requests to change the stability mode until the
next ignition cycle or until the vehicle condition or fault is
returned to normal. When the Stability Secure Mode is
activated, you may see other messages, such as
SERVICE STEERING SYS, SERVICE SUSPENSION
SYS or CHECK TIRE PRESSURE on the DIC. When the
Stability Secure Mode is activated, a larger degree of
steering wheel input at low vehicle speeds and a smaller
degree of steering wheel input at high vehicle speeds
may be required. Stability Secure Mode will be activated
if you are using a compact spare tire. See DIC Warnings
page 5-106.
Enhanced StabiliTrak® can be operated in Touring Mode
or Competitive Mode. It can also be turned off. The
traction control button is used to change stability control
modes (Touring, Competitive or Off) as well as to turn
traction control on or off. See Traction Control System
the operation of the traction control button for changing
Traction Control and Stability Control Modes.
When you start your vehicle, Stability control comes on
automatically in the Stability Touring Mode.
• To change from Stability Touring Mode to Stability
Competitive Mode, press and hold the traction
control button for about three seconds until
the STABILITY COMPETITIVE MODE message is
displayed on the DIC.
Persistent operation of your vehicle in the STABILITY
SECURE MODE may be an indication that your vehicle
needs to be serviced by the dealer/retailer.
• To change from Stability Touring Mode to Stability
Off Mode, press and hold the traction control
button for about five seconds until the STABILITY
SYS OFF message is displayed on the DIC.
The DIC will temporarily display the STABILITY
COMPETITIVE MODE message prior to displaying
the STABILITY SYS OFF message.
When certain faults are present, the vehicle’s speed may
be limited and the SPEED LIMITED TO XXX message
will be displayed on the DIC. See DIC Warnings and
limited, you may see other messages, such as SERVICE
STABILITY SYS, SERVICE STEERING SYS or
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS on the DIC. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• To change from Stability Competitive Mode to
Stability Touring Mode, press the traction control
button briefly and the STABILITY TOURING MODE
message will be displayed on the DIC.
• To turn traction control off while in the Stability
Touring Mode, press the traction control button
briefly and the traction control system warning light
will come on. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-6.
• To change from Stability Competitive Mode to
Stability Off Mode, press and hold the traction
control button for approximately five seconds until
the STABILITY SYS OFF message is displayed
on the DIC. The DIC will temporarily display
the STABILITY TOURING MODE message and
then the STABILITY COMPETITIVE MODE
message prior to displaying the STABILITY SYS
OFF message.
• To turn traction control on while in the Stability
Touring Mode, press the traction control button
briefly and the traction control system warning light
will turn off.
Panic Brake Assist
Your vehicle has a panic brake assist system that
monitors the intention of the driver while braking. If the
system senses that the driver has applied hard/fast
pressure to the brake pedal, the system will generate
additional pressure, making it easier for the driver
to maintain brake application. When this happens the
brake pedal will feel easier to push. Just hold the brake
pedal down firmly and let the system work for you.
You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice
some noise but this is normal. The brakes will return to
normal operation after the brake pedal has been
released.
• To change from Stability Off Mode to Stability
Touring Mode, press the traction control button
briefly and the STABILITY TOURING MODE
message will be displayed on the DIC.
• To change from Stability Off Mode to Stability
Competitive Mode, press and hold the traction
control button for about three seconds until
the STABILITY COMPETITIVE MODE message is
displayed on the DIC. The DIC will temporarily
display the STABILITY TOURING MODE message
prior to displaying the STABILITY COMPETITIVE
MODE message.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
system reduces steering effort at low speeds, improves
steering feel at moderate speeds, and reduces
steering sensitivity at higher speeds.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
If your vehicle has this feature, engine power is sent to
all four wheels all the time. This is like four-wheel
drive, but it is fully automatic.
During some operating conditions, the active steering
might deactivate to protect the system from damage.
You might notice that the center position of the steering
wheel is changed. Unless there is a SERVICE
STEERING SYS message, the system will return to
normal operation as soon as the condition ceases,
usually within a very short period of time.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
At low speeds, the active steering system requires less
movement of the steering wheel to change vehicle
direction than the normal power steering system. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
Speed Variable Assist Steering
When certain steering faults are present, the active
steering deactivates and vehicle speed might be limited.
The SERVICE STEERING SYS and SPEED LIMITED
TO XXX messages will be displayed. See DIC Warnings
steering system is still operational. You might notice that
the center position of the steering wheel is changed
and that more steering effort at low speeds and
less steering effort at high speeds is required. You can
continue to drive your vehicle with normal power
steering but you should have your dealer/retailer inspect
the steering system as soon as possible in order to
have the problem corrected and the steering wheel
position centered.
Your vehicle has a steering system that continuously
adjusts the effort you feel when steering at all vehicle
speeds. It provides ease when parking, yet a firm, solid
feel at highway speeds.
Active Steering
All-wheel-drive vehicles with the Active Steering with
Enhanced StabiliTrak® option have an electronically
controlled active steering system. The active steering
system uses the steering actuator to automatically adjust
the front road wheel turning angle based on vehicle
speed and how much you turn the steering wheel. This
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When stability control activates, the system
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
automatically adjusts the front road wheel steering
angle, modifies the suspension stiffness, and selectively
applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s
brakes to help maintain directional control of the vehicle.
Adjustments to the steering will not be felt in the
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
It is recommended that the battery not be disconnected
when the steering wheel is turned from the center
position. If this occurs, the center position of the steering
wheel could be temporarily changed a small amount.
You can continue to operate your vehicle and, after
a short time, the center position of the steering wheel
will return to normal.
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Traction Control
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Your stability system might be active. See DIC Warnings
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the
front wheels are straight ahead.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
can from a possible collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available.
To help you steer in the direction you want to go, during
certain sharp or sudden cornering maneuvers, gear
selection is controlled. This will maximize the available
drive wheel torque and minimize the transmission
response time and shift activity. During this kind of
maneuver, the transmission shifts automatically
as vehicle speed changes.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
page 4-4. It is better to remove as much speed as you
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
we suggest the following tips:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass. If
in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You might see the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message
on the Driver Information Center. See DIC Warnings and
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
Competitive Driving
See your warranty book before using your vehicle for
competitive driving.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
Notice: If you use your vehicle for competitive
driving, the engine may use more oil than it would
with normal use. Low oil levels can damage the
engine. Be sure to check the oil level often during
competitive driving and keep the level at or near the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range
on the engine oil dipstick. For information on how to
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because your headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
• Watch for animals.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
Driving at Night
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But,
as we get older, these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
{CAUTION:
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They might
not work as well in a quick stop and could
cause pulling to one side. You could lose
control of the vehicle.
• Allow extra following distance.
• Pass with caution.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
on page 5-57.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
Other driving tips include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hill and Mountain Roads
{CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear.
{CAUTION:
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and the
road, you can have a very slippery situation. You have a
lot less traction, or grip, and need to be very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Traction Control System (TCS) improves your
ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road.
Even though you have TCS, slow down and adjust your
driving to the road conditions. Under certain conditions,
you might want to turn the TCS off, such as when
driving through deep snow and loose gravel, to help
maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. See Traction
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until
you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you
are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with the headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too severe
for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the rocking method.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all
the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and
repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from
the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel
as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out
of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the
area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or
forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning
before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when
the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels
in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a
rocking motion that could free your vehicle. If that does
not get your vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to
be towed out. If your vehicle does need to be towed out,
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label, and the Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see Tires
page 5-66.
Tire and Loading Information Label
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
Example Label
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The Tire and Loading Information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Example 1
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
page 4-40 for important information on towing a
trailer, towing safety rules and trailering tips.
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers, and
cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity
weight.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification Label
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
either the driver’s door edge or the lower center
pillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This label
shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, and cargo. The Certification
label also shows the maximum weights for
the front and rear axles, called the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). Never exceed the GVWR
or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else, they will go as
fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
{CAUTION:
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see Recreational Vehicle Towing following.
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
In a trunk, put them as far forward as
you can. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in this
section for more information.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-20.
Dolly Towing (Rear-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles) (STS Only)
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing your vehicle
may cause damage because of reduced ground
clearance. Always tow your vehicle using the dolly
towing or dinghy towing procedure listed in this
section or put your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolly Towing (STS-V)
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing your vehicle
may cause damage because of reduced ground
clearance. Always put your vehicle on a flat-bed
truck.
If you have an STS-V, it can only be towed on a
flat-bed trailer.
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
If you have an All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle, it can
only be towed on a flat-bed trailer.
If your vehicle is a rear-wheel drive, it can be towed
using a dolly. To tow your vehicle using a dolly, follow
these steps:
1. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
Towing a Trailer (Vehicles With
Heavy Duty Cooling)
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer with your
vehicle.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to
work harder against the drag of the added weight.
The engine is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat.
Also, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
Vehicles with heavy duty cooling can tow a trailer if it is
equipped with the proper trailer towing equipment.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. Trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer/retailer about sway controls.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted form the maximum trailer weight.
• The weight of the trailer tongue.
• The total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
You can ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering
information or advice, or you can write us at our
Customer Assistance Offices. See Customer Assistance
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers, or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And if you
tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the
GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight,
more information about your vehicle’s maximum load
capacity.
If you are using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total
loaded trailer weight (B).
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label. See Loading Your
the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight
of the trailer tongue.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hitches
Safety Chains
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If
you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you do not seal them,
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust
can get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-38. Dirt and water can also enter
the vehicle.
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
you will be able to install, adjust and maintain them
properly.
Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap
into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake
systems will not work well, or at all.
Trailer Wiring Harness
All of the electrical circuits required for your trailer
lighting system can be accessed at the driver’s side rear
lamp connector. This connector is located under the
carpet on the rear corner of the trunk compartment.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
You will need more passing distance up ahead when
you are towing a trailer. And, because the vehicle
is a good deal longer, you will need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Backing Up
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Following Distance
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift down,
you might have to use your brakes so much that they
would get hot and no longer work well.
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer/retailer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
On a long uphill grade, shift down to THIRD (3) and
reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of engine and transmission overheating.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It
is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People can
be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
Your vehicle has bulb warning lights. When you plug a
trailer lighting system into your vehicle’s lighting
system, its bulb warning lights may not let you know if
one of your lamps goes out. So, when you have a trailer
lighting system plugged in, be sure to check your
vehicle and trailer lamps from time to time to be sure
they are all working. Once you disconnect the trailer
lamps, the bulb warning lights again can tell you if one
of your vehicle lamps is out.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here is how
to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake
system. Each of these is covered in this manual, and
the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re
trailering, it’s a good idea to review this information
before you start your trip.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
• Start your engine.
• Shift into a gear.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
page 5-29.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Towing a Trailer (Vehicles Without
Heavy Duty Cooling)
Vehicles without heavy duty cooling are neither designed
nor intended to tow a trailer.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your
GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
Doing Your Own Service Work
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind
noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield
washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the 4.6L V8 engine (VIN Code A),
use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular
unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but
your vehicle’s acceleration could be slightly reduced,
and you might notice a slight audible knocking
noise, commonly referred to as spark knock. If the
octane is less than 87, you might notice a heavy
knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you could damage the engine.
If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
If your vehicle has the 4.4L V8 engine (VIN Code D), use
premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 91 or higher. For best performance, use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 93. In
an emergency, you can use regular unleaded gasoline
with an octane rating of 87 or higher. If 87 octane fuel is
used, do not perform any aggressive driving maneuvers
such as wide open throttle applications. You might also
hear audible spark knock during acceleration. Refill the
tank with premium fuel as soon as possible to avoid
damaging the engine. If you are using gasoline rated at
91 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
Gasoline Octane
If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code V),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511
in Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
additional information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In
most cases, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. To help
keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if
your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors
or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your dealer/retailer has
additives that will help correct and prevent most
deposit-related problems.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance might be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might fail
a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-68. If this occurs, return to your authorized
dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
might not be covered by your warranty.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the
emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tethered fuel cap is
located behind a hinged
fuel door on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
To open the fuel door, apply pressure in the center of
the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank, and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The CHECK GAS CAP message will appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) display if the fuel cap is
not reinstalled properly. See DIC Warnings and
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You
can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-68.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
Checking Things Under
the Hood
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
lever with this symbol
on it. It is located inside
the vehicle on the lower
left side of the
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
instrument panel.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Overview
Your vehicle may be equipped with front compartment
underhood sight shields, which surround the vehicle’s
engine cover. These sight shields will need to be
removed in order to access some of the underhood
components in your vehicle.
To remove the sight shields, turn the fasteners on each
shield to the left until they pop out. Then remove the
fasteners and lift the shields up and away from the tower
to tower brace.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release lever. The lever is located
under the front edge of the grille near the center.
Push the release lever up and raise the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.6L V6 Engine
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After you have removed the sight shields (if equipped) on the 3.6L V6 engine, here is what you will see:
on page 5-118.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
page 5-45.
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
page 5-45.
J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-29
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-40.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6L V8 Engine
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After you have removed the sight shields (if equipped) on the 4.6L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
page 5-45.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
page 5-45.
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-29
on page 5-118.
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-40.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4L V8 STS-V Engine
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After you have removed the sight shields (if equipped) on the 4.4L V8 STS-V engine, here is what you will see:
on page 5-118.
J. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
page 5-45.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
page 5-45.
L. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-29
If your vehicle is equipped with front compartment
underhood sight shields, before closing the hood be sure
to reinstall the sight shields. To reinstall the shields,
locate the tabs on the left and right sides and insert
them into the openings in the tower to tower brace. Then
insert the fasteners into the top of the shield and push
the fasteners back into place.
F. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-40.
I. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Add Engine Oil
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
V8 Engine
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for three things:
• GM4718M
Look for this on the oil container, and use only those
oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard
GM4718M and have the starburst symbol on the front of
the oil container.
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as synthetic. However,
not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard.
Look for and use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirements for
your vehicle.
Notice: If your vehicle is an STS-V model, the
engine uses a special oil filter. The use of any other
engine oil filter could lead to filter failure and
result in severe engine damage. Damage caused by
use of the wrong engine oil filter would not be
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in
the DIC will come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-80. Change the oil as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil
life system might not indicate that an oil change
is necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service people who will perform this
work using genuine parts and reset the system. It is
also important to check the oil regularly and keep it at
the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are all
you need for good performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last
oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change the oil prior
to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the DIC
being turned on, reset the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling
center for help.
After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message must be reset. To reset the
message:
1. Press the up or down arrow to scroll the DIC to
show OIL LIFE.
2. Once the XXX% ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item is
highlighted, press and hold the RESET button until
the percentage shows 100%.
If the percentage does not return to 100% or if the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
4.6L V8 Engine shown, 3.6L V6 Engine similar
To inspect or replace the filter in the 3.6L V6 or
4.6L V8 engines, do the following:
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle, near
page 5-11 for more information on locating the air
cleaner/filter.
1. Remove the two screws located on the top of
the cover.
2. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose so that it
is not going across the top of the engine air
cleaner/filter.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Loosen the clamp and remove the duct from the
passenger’s side of the engine air cleaner/filter.
{CAUTION:
4. The two sides of the airbox are hinged at the
bottom. Open the airbox by pushing the top of
the airbox cover toward the engine.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
5. Remove the air filter by lifting it straight up through
the opening in the airbox.
6. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. See
page 6-15 for the correct part number for the filter.
7. Reinstall the cover by reversing Steps 1 through 4.
If your vehicle has the 4.4L V8 STS-V engine, there
is a special procedure for checking and changing the air
cleaner/filter. Because this procedure is difficult, you
should have this done at the dealership service
department. Contact your dealer for additional
information or the procedure can be found in the service
manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the
dealer/retailer service department and have it repaired
as soon as possible.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
page 5-29.
There is a special procedure for checking and changing
the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is
difficult, you should have this done at the dealership
service department. Contact your dealer for additional
information or the procedure can be found in the service
manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by your warranty.
Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core, and other parts.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
If you have to add coolant more than once or twice a
year, have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of the surge tank.
Follow the arrow from the top of the tank down the
side to the horizontal mark.
The coolant surge tank and pressure cap are located on
the driver’s side of the vehicle, toward the rear of the
engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
Checking Intercooler System Coolant
(4.4L V8 STS-V Engine Only)
Park the vehicle on a level surface and turn off the
engine. When the engine is cold, the coolant level
should be visible in the intercooler fill neck.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the intercooler fill neck, but only
page 5-32 for instructions on how to add coolant to the
intercooler fill neck.
the location of the intercooler system pressure cap.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Overheating
{CAUTION:
There are two engine hot messages that could be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
more information.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
If the engine is overheating, then you will find a
coolant temperature gage and a coolant warning light
on the instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
information.
When replacing a pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Turn it off and get everyone
away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait
until there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
An overheat warning, can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or
hear no steam, the problem might not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
to a safe place in an emergency.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven
to a safe place in an emergency. Should an overheated
engine condition exist, an overheat protection mode
which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent
engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a loss
in power and engine performance. An engine overheat
warning will indicate that an overheat condition
exists. Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a
trailer in the overheat protection mode should be
avoided.
2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat setting
and fan speed and open the windows, as
necessary.
If the coolant warning light is not on or the coolant
temperature gage does not indicate the engine
is overheating, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive
slower for about 10 minutes. If the warnings do not come
back on, drive normally.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss and change the oil.
If the warnings continue and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park the vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three
minutes while parked. If the warnings are still indicated,
turn off the engine and get everyone out of the
vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in this section.
You might decide not to lift the hood but to get
service help right away.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some vehicles may have an engine driven fan, as well
as the electric pusher fans which are located behind
the vehicle’s grille.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, this is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or slightly above the FULL COLD/FROID line on the
side of the coolant surge tank. If it is not, you may have
a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
3.6L V6 Engine shown, 4.6L V8 and 4.4L V8 STS-V
Engines similar
A. Engine Cooling Fans
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
page 5-31 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak.
If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant.
That could cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak fixed before
you drive the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,
check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
{CAUTION:
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD/FROID
line on the side of the coolant surge tank, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The
engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap
when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about one-quarter of a turn.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD/FROID
line on the side of the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
Start the engine and allow it to warm up.
How to Add Coolant to the Intercooler
System Fill Neck (4.4L V8 STS-V
Engine Only)
If you have not found a problem yet, turn the engine off
and allow it to cool down, then check to see if coolant
is visible within the horizontal tube section of the
fill neck. If coolant is not visible, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant to
the fill neck. Be sure the Intercooler System, including
the Intercooler System pressure cap, is cool before
information.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to slightly above the
FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of the
coolant surge tank.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. The upper radiator
hose is the largest of the hoses which comes out of
the radiator, on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Watch out for the engine cooling fans.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
Turning the Intercooler System pressure cap
when the engine and intercooler are hot can
allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. Never turn the Intercooler
System pressure cap, even a little, when the
engine and intercooler are hot.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The
engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
3. Add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture to the
fill neck, until the coolant reaches the COLD FILL
line on the fill neck.
4. With the Intercooler System pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run for a couple of minutes.
Then turn the engine off. By this time, the coolant
level inside the fill neck may be lower. If the
level drops to where coolant is no longer visible in
the horizontal tube section of the fill neck, with
the engine off add more of the DEX-COOL® coolant
mixture to the fill neck until the level is again
visible in the horizontal tube section.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
1. Remove the Intercooler System pressure cap when
the Intercooler System, including the upper
intercooler hoses, are no longer hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about
one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for
that to stop. This allows any pressure still left to be
vented.
If the coolant is not at the proper level when the
system cools down again, see your dealer.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
reservoir location.
1. Turn the ignition off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The level should be within the HOT mark. If necessary,
add only enough fluid to bring the level within the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
The CHECK WASHER FLUID message will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the fluid
page 3-80 for more information.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-11 for reservoir
location.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove
brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
reservoir location and
access.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the
engine is hot enough. You or others could be
burned, and your vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake hydraulic system.
If it is, you should have the brake hydraulic system fixed,
since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes
will not work well.
If the ignition is on and the brake fluid is low, the
CHECK BRAKE FLUID message will be displayed in
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
When you do need brake fluid, DOT-3 brake fluid is
recommended for use. DOT-4 brake fluid is also
compatible with your vehicle’s brake system parts.
However, if you choose to use DOT-4 fluid, it is
recommended that you flush the brake hydraulic system
and refill it with new DOT-4 fluid at a regular
maintenance service every two years. See Additional
fluid from a sealed container only. See Recommended
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
well. This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are
pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Vehicle Storage
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt
page 5-45 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery
or use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain
the charge of the battery over an extended period
of time.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When
it is time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer
for one that has the replacement number shown on
the original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations or the remote
positive (+) and remote negative (−) terminals of the
other vehicle. Then locate the remote positive (+)
location on your vehicle. See Engine Compartment
locations the terminals.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) ground
location, as shown in the illustration. It is located
on the passenger side front shock tower. See
should always use this remote ground location,
instead of the terminal on the battery.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the
Engine Control Module (ECM), ECM mounting
bracket, or any cables that attach to the ECM
bracket, you may damage the ECM. Always attach
the negative cable to your vehicle’s remote negative
ground location, instead of the ECM, ECM bracket,
or any cables attached to the ECM bracket.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative terminal of the good battery. Use a
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle
has one. Your vehicle’s remote negative (−) ground
location is for this purpose.
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive
All of the lubricant checks in this section apply to your
vehicle. If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, there
is an additional system that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check the transfer case
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to
overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
A. Drain Plug
B. Fill Plug
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check the front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
A. Drain Plug
B. Filler Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add
some lubricant.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Halogen Bulbs
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
{CAUTION:
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{CAUTION:
Back-Up Lamps
To replace a back-up lamp bulb:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you
try to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
service them.
information.
Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your vehicle’s
HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice
that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was
originally. This is normal.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-up
3157K
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
Windshield Replacement
Your windshield is part of the Head-Up Display (HUD)
system. If you ever have to get your windshield
replaced, get one that is designed for HUD or your
HUD image may look out of focus.
2. Pull out the push pins holding down the top portion
of the cloth cover.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
3. Fold the cover down slightly and locate the lamp
assembly.
4. Turn the socket counterclockwise and pull it straight
out to remove it from the lamp assembly.
It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper
windshield wiper blade length and type, see Normal
5. Pull the old bulb straight out and reinstall the
new bulb.
6. Reverse the steps to reinstall.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STS-V models will automatically move the windshield
wipers to the park position if the hood is open.
Make sure the hood is closed before replacing your
windshield wiper blades.
To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the following:
1. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from
the windshield.
3. Replace the blade assembly with a new one.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed could damage
the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not allow the
wiper blade arm to touch the windshield.
4. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.
2. Squeeze the tabs on each side of the wiper blade
assembly and slide the assembly off the end of the
wiper arm.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
{CAUTION:
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when
you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if
your tires have been damaged,
replace them.
• Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See Loading Your
CAUTION: (Continued)
for inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed driving.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low-Profile Performance Tires
Winter Tires
If your vehicle has 255/45ZR18, P255/45R18 or
P275/40R19 size tires, they are classified as
low-profile performance tires. These tires are
designed for very responsive driving on wet or dry
pavement. You may also notice more road noise
with low-profile performance tires and that they tend
to wear faster. These performance tires are not
rated as all-season tires. Winter tires are
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance on
most surfaces but they may not offer the traction
you would like or the same level of performance as
winter tires on snow or ice covered roads.
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter
tires, there may be decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After
switching to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
handling and braking.
recommended for snow or ice covered roads.
Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,
they are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage
can occur when coming into contact with
road hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged
objects, or when sliding into a curb. Your
vehicle warranty does not cover this type of
damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation
pressure and, when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.
See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range,
and speed rating as the original equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.
For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use
when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
page 5-66.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter
P as the first character in the tire size means
a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,
as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as
high as it is wide.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is
used to indicate the type of ply construction
in the tire. The letter R means radial ply
construction; the letter D means diagonal or
bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 5-66.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
page 4-26.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-26.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the
tread and the bead.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a tire goes flat, you will not need to stop on the side
of the road to change the tire. You can just keep on
driving. The vehicle’s run-flat tires can operate effectively
with no air pressure for up to 50 miles (80 km) at
speeds up to 55 mph (90 km/h). The shorter the
distance you drive and the slower the speed, the greater
the chance that the tire will not have to be replaced.
When a tire is filled with air, it provides a cushion
between the road and the wheel. Because you will not
have this cushion when driving on a deflated run-flat
tire, try to avoid potholes that could damage your wheel
and require replacement of it.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Run-Flat Tires (STS-V)
If your vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no spare tire
and no tire changing equipment. Your vehicle also has a
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) which will alert
you if there is a loss of tire pressure in any of the tires.
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair.
This damage could occur even before you have
driven on the tire in a deflated condition. When a tire
has been damaged, or if you have driven any distance
on a deflated run-flat tire, check with an authorized
run-flat tire service center, as soon as possible,
to determine whether the tire can be repaired or should
be replaced. To maintain your vehicle’s run-flat
feature, all replacement tires must be self-supporting
tires. To locate the nearest GM or authorized run-flat
servicing facility, call Roadside Service. See Roadside
{CAUTION:
When the low tire warning light is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster, your vehicle’s
handling capabilities will be reduced during
severe maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You or
others could be injured. Do not drive over
55 mph (90 km/h) when the low tire warning
light is displayed. Drive cautiously and check
your tire pressures as soon as you can.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
{CAUTION:
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Run-flat tires are constructed differently than
other tires and could explode during improper
service. You or others could be injured or
killed if you attempt to repair, replace,
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
dismount, or mount a run-flat tire. Let only an
authorized run-flat service center repair,
replace, dismount, and mount run-flat tires.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
The valve stems on your vehicle’s run-flat tires have
sensors that are part of the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS). These sensors contain batteries which
are designed to last for 10 years under normal driving
conditions. See your GM dealer, if the TPMS sensors or
a wheel ever need replacement.
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tire
valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in your
vehicle’s run-flat tires. This damage would not
be covered by warranty. Do not use liquid sealants
in your vehicle’s run-flat tires.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label
lists your vehicle’s original equipment tires and
shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires
when they are cold. The recommended cold
tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to
support your vehicle’s maximum load carrying
capacity.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the tire and loading information label, see
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
When to Check
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, if your
vehicle has one. The compact spare should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
page 4-26.
High-Speed Operation
Example:
{CAUTION:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for
high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).
excessive heat build up and can cause sudden
tire failure. You could have a crash and you or
others could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are
rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
If you will be driving at high speeds, speeds of
100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set the
cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation
pressure shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa),
whichever is lower. See the example following. When
you end this high-speed driving, return the tires to
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
for additional information.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 of
Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the
low tire pressure warning
light located on the
1. This device may not cause interference.
instrument panel cluster.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light
and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can
be viewed by the driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire
and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel
assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure
in the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for
the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light
and DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the
conditions that can cause the malfunction light and
DIC message to come on are:
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your
vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading Your
Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle.
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The DIC message should go off once
you re-install the road tire containing the TPMS
sensor.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
Your vehicle, when new, may have included a
factory-installed Tire Inflator Kit. This kit uses a GM
approved liquid tire sealant. See Tire Sealant and
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
later in this section.
Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using
an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved tire
sealant available through your dealer/retailer.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in
the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side
rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall. If using this method to match
TPMS sensors, the complete procedure outlined below
must be performed within 15 minutes of the vehicle
being stationary.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
page 5-76.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
You will have one minute to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall, to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than one minute to
match the first tire and wheel, or more than five
minutes to match all four tire/wheel positions, the
matching process stops and you will need to start over.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate your vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPM matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
10. After hearing the confirming single horn chirp for the
driver side rear tire, a double horn chirp will sound to
signal the tire matching mode is no longer active.
Press the push-button ignition switch to Acc.
2. Press the push-button ignition switch to Acc.
3. Using the keyless access transmitter, lock and
unlock the vehicle’s doors.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the tire and loading information
label.
4. Press the lock and unlock buttons, at the same
time, on the keyless access transmitter. A single
horn chirp will sound, indicating that the TPMS
is ready, and the sensor matching process
can begin.
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
5. Start with the driver side front tire.
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds to sound,
confirms that the sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire position.
Tire rotation is not recommended if your vehicle
has the following performance tire combinations:
• P235/50R17 size tires on the front wheels
and P255/45R17 size tires on the rear wheels.
• P235/50ZR18 size tires on the front wheels
and P255/45ZR18 size tires on the rear
wheels.
• P255/45R18 size tires on the front wheels and
P275/40R19 size tires on the rear wheels.
7. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 6.
8. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 6.
9. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 6.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different tire sizes should not be rotated front to
rear. Each tire and wheel should only be used
in the original front or rear position it is in.
Tire rotation is recommended if the vehicle is
equipped with P235/50R17 size tires on all four
wheel positions or 255/45ZR18 size tires on
all four wheel positions. These tires should be
rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to
page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that the vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
When rotating P235/50R17 size tires or
255/45ZR18 size tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
If the vehicle has a compact spare tire, do not
include the compact spare tire in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
on page 4-26.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One way to tell when
it is time for new tires
is to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
tires have only
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
When It Is Time for New Tires
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
the TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for
for additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep
your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires
were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect
the braking and handling performance of your vehicle.
The optional 18-inch performance tires, size
255/45ZR18 99Y, used on some vehicles, meets the
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec) rating but the TPC Spec code has not
been molded onto the tire’s sidewall. If your vehicle has
these tires, and you need to replace them, you can
still get these TPC Spec rated tires by asking your
GM dealer. Your GM dealer can order these tires by part
number. This way, your vehicle will continue to give
the proper endurance, handling, traction, and ride as the
original tires.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snow tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design,
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
(other than those originally installed on your
vehicle), brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash. Using
tires of different sizes (other than those
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
originally installed on your vehicle), brands, or
types may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the correct size, brand, and
type of tires on all wheels. It is all right to drive
with your vehicle’s compact spare temporarily,
it was developed for use on your vehicle. See
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on it. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning that is
higher or lower than the proper warning level you
would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading
the Tire and Loading Information label and its location
on your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a GM certified technician.
Vehicles that have performance tires P235/50R17 95V
(front axle) and P255/45R17 98V (rear axle) are mounted
on wheels with different rim widths. The front axle tires
are mounted on rims 7.5 inches (19.05 cm) wide and
the rear axle tires require wheels with a minimum rim
width of 8 inches (20.32 cm). The original equipment
wheels designed for P255/45R17 98V size tires are
etched with the words REAR ONLY. When replacing
P255/45R17 98V size tires have them mounted on
wheels with a minimum width of 8 inches (20.32 cm) and
page 5-80.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability,
and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes,
traction control, and electronic stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment might need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
information.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Chains
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels.
If your vehicle has P255/45R17, P235/50ZR18,
P255/45ZR18, P275/40R19, or 255/45ZR18 size
tires, do not use tire chains, as there is not
enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause damage
to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and you or others may be injured in a crash.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires only.
Notice: If your vehicle has P235/50R17 size tires,
use tire chains only where legal and only when you
must. Use only SAE Class S-type chains that are
the proper size for your tires. Install them on the rear
tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with
the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow
the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can
hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow
down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the
wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lifting Your Vehicle (STS-V)
CAUTION: (Continued)
3. With your right foot still holding the brake
pedal down, set the parking brake with
your left foot.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured. Find a level place to lift your vehicle.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
4. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you can put blocks in front of and
behind the wheels. Also, see Shifting Into
page 2-35 for additional information.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your
right foot.
2. Move the shift lever in PARK (P) by
pressing the button on the front of the
shift lever while pushing the lever all the
way toward the front of the vehicle.
Release the button.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. To lift your vehicle
properly, follow the advice in this part.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
To help prevent vehicle damage:
• Be sure the jack you are using meets the weight
standards for your vehicle and is in good
working order.
• Be sure to place a block or pad between the
jack and the vehicle.
• Make sure the jack you are using only contacts
the jacking location lift points and is not leaning
on any other vehicle components such as the
rocker panels, the floor pan, or the stone guard
moldings.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle or the
vehicle may fall and cause your or others injury.
• Lift only in the areas shown in the following
pictures.
If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle, follow the
instructions that came with the jack, and be sure to use
the correct lifting points to avoid damaging your vehicle.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lifting From the Front
Lifting From the Rear
The front lifting points can be accessed from either side
of your vehicle, behind the front tires.
The rear lifting points can be accessed from either side
of your vehicle, in front of the rear tires.
1. Locate the front lifting points using the diagram
above. The front lifting location is about 15 inches
(37 cm) from the rear edge of the front wheel well.
1. Locate the rear lifting points using the diagram
above. The rear lifting location is about 7 inches
(17 cm) from the front edge of the rear wheel well.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
is centered on the front lifting point.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
is centered on the rear lifting point.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. See
more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever
have a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect
and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If your vehicle has 255/45ZR18 size tires, there is no
spare tire, jack, or tire changing equipment. A tire inflator
kit, included with your vehicle, may be used to seal
small punctures in the tread area of the tire. See Tire
If a tire goes flat, and your vehicle has a compact spare
information shows you how to use your vehicle’s tire
changing equipment and how to change a flat tire safely.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run-Flat Tires (STS-V)
If your vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no spare tire
and no tire changing equipment. Run-flat tires can
operate effectively with no air pressure for a limited
distance and speed. These tires perform so well without
any air pressure that a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
is used to alert you when there is a low tire condition.
{CAUTION:
Special tools and procedures are required to
service a run-flat tire. If these special tools and
procedures are not used you or others could
be injured and your vehicle could be damaged.
Always be sure the proper tools and
procedures, as described in the service
manual, are used.
{CAUTION:
When the low tire warning light is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster, your vehicle’s
handling capabilities will be reduced during
severe maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You or
others could be injured. Do not drive over
55 mph (90 km/h) when the low tire warning
light is displayed. Drive cautiously and check
your tire pressures as soon as you can.
To order a service manual see Service Publications
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Your vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit that
is capable of temporarily sealing small punctures in
the tread. There is no jack or spare tire. The kit inflates
the tire with liquid sealant and air. After the tire is
inflated to the recommended inflation pressure, see
information, the vehicle must be driven for five miles to
distribute the sealant in the tire and seal the puncture.
After driving five miles the tire pressure must be
rechecked and adjusted as needed. See Using the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit later in this section.
information.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure to read and follow all of the tire sealant and
compressor kit instructions. The kit includes:
If the sealant is not removed from the tire within
100 miles (161 kilometers) of driving, the dealer/retailer
may recommend that the tire be replaced.
Accessing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
To access the tire sealant and compressor kit:
information.
A. Air Compressor
E. Air Pressure Gage
B. Tire Sealant Canister F. Air Compressor
C. Air Compressor
Accessory Plug
Inflator Hose
G. Sealant Filling Hose
D. On/Off Switch
After temporarily repairing the tire sealant and
compressor kit, it is recommended to take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
2. Locate the tire sealant and compressor kit on the
driver side of the vehicle, near the back corner of
the trunk.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The sealant can only be used to seal one tire. After
usage, the sealant canister and sealant filling hose
assembly must be replaced at a dealer/retailer. See
Removal and Installation of Sealant Canister later in
this section.
3. Remove the tire
sealant and
compressor kit strap by
squeezing the two
tabs of the quick
release buckle.
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister, if it has expired, see your dealer/retailer for a
replacement.
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
Follow these directions closely for correct sealant usage.
1. Place the sealant and compressor kit on the ground
and unwrap the sealant filling hose from the
compressor.
4. Remove the sealant and compressor kit from its
foam container.
Tire Sealant
2. Remove the air compressor accessory plug from
the unit. To do this, pull the top portion of the
wrapped cord out first, then the bottom, and then
unsnap the plug. Do not insert the plug into an
accessory outlet yet.
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the
sealant canister.
The sealant can temporarily seal small punctures in the
tread area of the tire. The sealant cannot seal sidewall
damage, large punctures, or a tire that has unseated
you need assistance.
3. Remove the valve stem cap or tire pressure
monitoring sensor from the flat tire by turning
it counterclockwise.
If an object, such as a nail, has penetrated the tire,
do not remove it.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine
page 2-29 for more information. The vehicle must be
running while using the air compressor.
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
4. Attach the sealant filling hose (A) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
Make sure the sealant and compressor kit on/off
switch (B) is in the O (off) position.
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C) into an
accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See
information.
7. Push the On/Off switch to the I (on) position.
The sealant and compressor kit will inject sealant and
air into the tire. Sealant may leak from the puncture
until the vehicle is driven and the hole has sealed.
Do not slam door or close window on the
compressor accessory plug cord.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The pressure gage will initially show a high pressure
while the compressor pushes the sealant into the
tire. Once the sealant is completely dispersed
into the tire, the pressure will quickly drop and start
to rise again as the tire inflates with air.
10. The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air
until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is
distributed in the tire.
Steps 11 through 18 must be done right after
Step 10.
8. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure, found on the Tire and Loading Information
label located on the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar)
below the vehicle’s door latch, using the air
pressure gage on the top of the unit.
11. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug from the
accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
12. Disconnect the sealant filling hose from the tire
valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and
replace the tire valve stem cap.
The pressure gage reads high while the compressor
is running. Turn the compressor off to get an
accurate pressure reading.
Be careful when handling the tire inflator
components as they may be hot after usage.
13. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after 15 minutes, the vehicle should not be
driven farther. Damage to the tire is severe and
the sealant will not be effective. Remove the
air compressor plug from the accessory power
outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire
14. Stow the air compressor accessory plug back in the
air compressor. To do this, wrap the air compressor
accessory plug, snap in the plug, and then push
in the bottom and then the top of the wrapped
air compressor accessory plug.
9. Push the sealant and compressor kit switch to
the O (off) position.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. If the flat tire was able
to inflate to the
{CAUTION:
recommended inflation
pressure, remove
the maximum speed
label from the sealant
canister.
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could cause injury.
In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire sealant
and compressor kit in the proper place.
16. Return the equipment to the proper storage location
in the trunk of your vehicle. You may need to
loosen the retention strap to wrap it around the
sealant and compressor kit and foam container.
To do this, pull apart the strap and loosen the strap
at the quick release buckle. Then snap the buckle
together, pull the strap tight, and secure the
loose end of the strap by mating the ends.
Place it in a highly visible location such as the
inside of the upper left corner of the windshield or
to the face of the radio/clock.
The maximum speed label reminds you to drive
cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
you have the damaged tire inspected and repaired.
17. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant evenly in the tire. Stop at a
safe location and check the tire pressure, refer
to Steps 1 through 8 under “Using the Air
Compressor without Sealant” next in this section.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18. If the tire pressure has fallen more then 10 psi
(68 kPa), below the recommended inflation
pressure, stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot seal the tire. See Roadside
Using the Air Compressor without
Sealant
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
and not sealant:
1. Remove the air compressor inflating hose connector
from the bottom of the air compressor.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, you can inflate the tire back up to
the recommended inflation pressure.
19. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire, and
vehicle with a rag.
20. Dispose of the sealant canister at a local
dealer/retailer or in accordance with your local state
codes and practices.
After using the sealant canister, replace it with a
new canister from your dealer/retailer.
21. After temporarily sealing a tire with the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take your vehicle to your
dealer/retailer to have the tire inspected and
repaired.
2. Unlock the air compressor hose from the sealant
canister by pulling up on the lever.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pull the air compressor inflator hose from the
sealant canister.
{CAUTION:
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the
tire valve stem and push the lever down to
secure in place.
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug into an
accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See Accessory
{CAUTION:
7. Move the sealant and compressor kit switch to
the I (on) position.
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine
8. Inflate the tire up to the recommended inflation
pressure using the air pressure gage on the top
of the unit.
The pressure gage read high while the compressor
is running. Turn the compressor off to get an
accurate reading.
page 2-29 for more information. The vehicle must be
running while using the air compressor.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Turn off the air compressor by moving the switch to
the O (off) position.
Removal and Installation of the Sealant
Canister
To remove the sealant canister:
{CAUTION:
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could cause injury.
In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire sealant
and compressor kit in the proper place.
10. Disconnect the compressor inflator hose and wrap
the hose in the bottom of the sealant and
compressor kit.
11. Place the equipment in the original location in the
trunk of your vehicle.
1. Unlock the air compressor inflator hose from the
sealant canister by pulling the lever up.
2. Disconnect the air compressor inflator hose from
the sealant canister.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Unwrap the sealant filling hose from the
compressor.
To install a new sealant canister:
1. Align the sealant filling hose with the slot in the air
compressor.
2. Push the sealant canister down and turn it
clockwise.
3. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the
sealant canister inlet and push the lever down.
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have an STS-V model, there is no spare tire and
no tire changing equipment. Your vehicle is equipped
page 5-65 for more information. If you have an STS
model, your vehicle may be equipped with a tire inflator
for more information. If your vehicle is not equipped
with a tire inflator kit, follow the directions for changing a
flat tire in this section.
4. Turn the sealant canister so the inflator filling hose
is aligned with the slot in the compressor.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
5. Lift the sealant canister from the compressor and
replace with a new sealant canister. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
about the compact spare tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is located in the trunk.
To gain access to the compact spare tire and jacking
equipment:
information.
2. Remove the compact spare tire cover.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A) and the
wheel wrench (B).
3. Turn the nut holding the jack package container
counterclockwise and remove it. Then remove the
jack and wheel wrench.
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
3. Find the vehicle’s jacking location using the
diagram above and corresponding V–shaped
notches located in the plastic molding on the
vehicle’s frame. The notches in the plastic molding
are marked with a triangle shape.
2. Loosen all of the wheel nuts, but do not remove
them yet, using the wheel wrench. Turn the
handle about 180 degrees, then flip the handle
back to the starting position. This avoids taking the
wrench off the lug nut for each turn.
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you position the jack under the rocker
molding and attempt to raise the vehicle, you could
break the molding and/or cause other damage to
your vehicle. Always position the jack so that when
the jack head is raised, it will fit firmly in the
notch located inboard from the rocker molding.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the jack lift head until the jack fits under the
vehicle.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until the slots in the jack head fit into the
metal flange located behind the triangle on the
plastic molding as shown.
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare tire to fit under the
vehicle.
7. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Remove all the wheel
nuts and the flat tire.
CAUTION: (Continued)
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
page 5-96.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
11. Install the spare tire.
12. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel.
14. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
13. Tighten each wheel nut by turning it clockwise with
your hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
{CAUTION:
sequence as shown.
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts
can cause the wheel to come loose and even
come off. This could lead to a crash. If you
have to replace them, be sure to get new
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Full-Size Tire and Tools
After you have put the compact spare tire on your
vehicle, you will need to do the following to store the flat
tire in your trunk.
2. Store the jack and wheel wrench in the jack
container in the trunk.
When storing the jack, in the container, it must be
raised until the screw end is flush with the edge
of the jack.
3. Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as
possible.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can.
A. Compact
Spare Tire
Cover
B. Plastic Wing
Nut
D. Jack Container
Package (With Wheel
Wrench and Jack)
E. Compact Spare Tire
F. Foam Support
G. Bolt
Compact Spare Tire and Tools
Use the following diagram as a guide for storing the
compact spare tire and tools in the trunk:
C. Retainer
2. Make sure the foam support (F) is in place in the
trunk area.
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Reinstall the compact spare tire (E) making sure to
line up the wheel center hole with the bolt (G) and
place on the compartment floor.
It’s best to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon
as soon as possible. The spare will last longer and be in
good shape if needed it again.
4. Insert the jack container (D) with wheel wrench and
jack into the center of the compact spare tire
making sure to line up the wheel nut hole with the
bolt (G) on the compartment floor.
If your vehicle has All Wheel Drive (AWD) it could also
page 4-8 for more information. If the compact spare tire
is installed on a vehicle with the StabiliTrak®
3
System, the vehicle operates in the Stability Secure
Mode. The STABILITY SECURE MODE message
displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See
more information.
5. Secure the tire and wheel with the retainer (C) and
wing nut (B).
6. Reinstall the compact spare tire cover (A).
Compact Spare Tire
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for
distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km). The tire inflation
monitor system must be calibrated after installing or
removing the compact spare. See Tire Pressure Monitor
when the compact spare is installed on the vehicle.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use glass cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To
prevent over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the
cleaning cloth.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being
cleaned. Permanent damage may result from using
cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended.
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wood Panels
Weatherstrips
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Care of Safety Belts
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states
that is should not be used on plastic parts, do not
use it on your vehicle or damage may occur and
it would not be covered by the warranty.
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that
are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on
your vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle
manufacturers’ directions regarding correct product
usage, necessary safety precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care product.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
5-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-110.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
5-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Sheet Metal Damage
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
5-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finish Damage
Chemical Paint Spotting
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
5-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Description
Polishing Cloth
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Cleans, shines, and
protects tires. No wiping
necessary.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans
and lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls
and raised white lettering.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Wash Wax Concentrate
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Spot Lifter
upholstery.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels.
Chrome Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Odor Eliminator
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
5-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the spare tire cover. It is very helpful if
you ever need to order parts. The label has the
following information:
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears
on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,
on the driver side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage would not be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
5-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuse
block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turn
off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring
checked right away.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the
current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is
fixed or goes away.
5-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The underhood fuse block is located in the front of the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the
page 5-11 for more information on location and removal
procedure for the front compartment underhood
sights shields.
Fuses Mini
A/C CLTCH
ABS
Usage
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
ABS Module-StabiliTrak®
Antilock Brake Controller
ABS IGN
AUX OUTLET Rear Accessory Power Outlet
BRK VAC
PUMP
To access the fuses, push in the tabs located on each
side of the fuse block cover, then lift the cover off.
Brake Vacuum Pump
CCP
Climate Control Panel
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Climate Control Panel, Headlamp
Level Control, Active Cruise Control,
Relay Coils, Starter, Front Blower
CCP/RLY
COILS
ECM 1
ECM/TCM
BATT
Engine Control Module (ECM)
ECM, Transmission Control
Module (TCM)
ECM, TCM, Instrument Panel
Cluster
Easy Key Module (EKM), Instrument
Panel Module (I/P MDL)
Even Ignition Coils, Even Fuel
Injectors
Front Fog Lamps
Fuses JCase
Usage
ABS Module- ABS
ABS MTR
Module-StabiliTrak®
Active Front Steering
Blower Motor
ECM/TCM IGN
EKM/I/P MDL
AFS
BLWR
FAN 1
FAN 2
LPDB 1
LPDB 2
RPDB 1
RPDB 2
SPARE
SPARE
STRTR
Cooling Fan-Low Speed
Cooling Fan-High Speed
Driver Side Rear Fuse Block
Driver Side Rear Fuse Block
Passenger Side Rear Fuse Block
Passenger Side Rear Fuse Block
Spare
EVEN COILS
FOG LAMP
FRT PWR
OUTLET
Front Accessory Power Outlet
FUEL COOL Fuel Cooling
HORN
HTD
WASH/AQS
Horn
Spare
Starter
Heated Headlamp Washer, Air
Quality Sensor
5-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses Mini
HUD
Usage
Fuses Mini
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
Usage
Heads-Up Display, Steering Column
Switch
IntelliBeam Relay
Instrument Panel Module, Assembly
Line Data Link Connector
License Plate, Instrument Panel
Dimming
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
I/BEAM
I/P MDL/ALDL
LIC DIM
Instrument Panel Module-Voltage
Check
Wipe/Wash Module Assembly
V/CHK
WPR
LT HI BEAM Driver Side High Beam Headlamp
LT LO BEAM Driver Side Low Beam Headlamp
WPR SW/VICS Rain Sensor, Wiper Switch
Driver Side Park Lamp/Driver Side
LT PRK
Taillamp
Relays
A/C CMPRSR
CLTCH
Usage
Odd Ignition Coils, Odd Fuel
ODD COILS
Injectors
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
POST
Post Oxygen Sensor
O2 SNSR
PRE O2 SNSR Pre Oxygen Sensor, CAM Sensors
Accessory Rain Sensor, Headlamp
Washer Relay Coil, Windshield
Wiper/Washer Module
ACCY
RAIN
SNSR/TPM
Rain Sensor, Relay Coil:
Headlamp Wash
Passenger Side High Beam
Headlamp
Passenger Side Low Beam
Headlamp
Passenger Side Park Lamp,
Passenger Side Taillamp
BRK
VAC PUMP
Brake Vacuum Pump
RT HI BEAM
RT LO BEAM
RT PRK
FAN S/P
FOG LAMP
FRT BLWR
FUEL COOL Fuel Cooling Pump
HI BEAM High Beam Headlamp
HI FAN SPD Cooling Fan High Speed
HORN Horn
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
Fog Lamps
Front Blower Motor
SPARE
SPARE
Spare
Spare
5-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
Relays
Usage
LO FAN SPD Cooling Fan Low Speed
LOW BEAM
W/O HID/HID Discharge (HID)
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
Low Beam Headlamp, High Intensity
Notice: If you touch the exposed wires with the
metal on the seat cushion, you could cause a short
that could damage the battery and or wires. Avoid
contact between the rear seat and the fuse
Parking Lamps, Instrument Panel
Dimming, Rear License Plate Lamps
Engine Controls
PRK LAMP
PWR/TRN
Heated Washer Nozzle, Air Quality,
Antilock Brake System, Climate
Control Panel, TCM, ECM,
Instrument Control Panel, Instrument
Control Panel Cluster
center whenever you remove or reinstall the rear
seat. Do not remove covers from any of the covered
parts, and do not store anything under the seats.
RUN CRNK
To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
STRTR
WPR HI
Spare
Spare
Spare
Starter
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release the
front hooks.
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of the
vehicle.
Windshield Wiper High Speed
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
Headlamp Washer Motor
(Circuit Breaker)
HDLP WASH
5-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly routed
through the seat cushion or is twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash. If the
safety belt has not been routed through the
seat cushion at all, it will not be there to work
for the next passenger. The person sitting in
that position could be badly injured. After
reinstalling the seat cushion, always check to
be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and are not twisted.
1. Buckle the center passenger position safety belt,
then route the safety belts through the proper slots
in the seat cushion. Do not let the safety belts
get twisted.
5-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the
seatback so the rear-locating guides hook into
the wire loops on the back frame.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward and
then press down on the seat cushion until the
spring locks on both ends engage.
4. Check to make sure the safety belts are properly
routed and that no portion of any safety belt is
trapped under the seat. Also make sure the seat
cushion is secured.
There is a fuse block located under the rear seat on the
driver’s side and passenger’s side of the vehicle. The
rear seat cushion must be removed to access the
fuse blocks. See “Removing the Rear Seat Cushion”
listed previously in this section.
To access the fuses, push in the two tabs, then lift the
cover off.
Your vehicle may not have all the fuses listed below.
5-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver’s Side
INCLR PUMP Inner Cooler Pump (Option)
Electronic Level Control, Exhaust
ELC EXH
DDM
Solenoid (Option)
Theft Sensors, Auto Shifter, Power
THEFT/SHFT
Sounder
Driver Door Module, Front Door
SubWoofers (Option)
Magnetic Ride Control Module
MRTD MDL
(Option)
5-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Relays
Usage
Infotainment (Export Only),
Supervisory Control Module (Option)
Left Rear Taillamp, Position Lamps
(Option)
TV/VICS/SCM
LT POS
REAR
Right Rear Taillamp, Position Lamps
(Option)
Ignition 3
Rear Taillamps, Position Lamps
(Option)
Rear Heated Seats
RT POS
RUN
HTD/SEATS
SPARE
SPARE
Spare
Spare
STDBY LAMP
Front Passenger Heated Seat, Auto
Shifter, Occupant Protection,
Electronic Tension Reducer for
Seatbelt
TRUNK RELSE Trunk Release Motor
IGN3
Reverse Lamps, Rear Parking Aid,
Inside Rearview Mirror
BCK/UP LAMP
REAR SHLF
SPKR
MSM
TRUNK
RELSE SW
Rear Shelf Speaker (Option)
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
Memory Seat Module Lumbar
Trunk Release, Valet Lockout
Switch
PWR SEATS Power Seats
Reverse Lamps, Rear Parking Aid,
Inside Rearview Mirrors
AIR BAG/BATT Airbag
POS LAMPS Rear Taillamps
ELC CMPRSR Automatic Level Control (Option)
BCK/UP LAMP
Diodes
SPARE
Usage
Usage
Spare
Joint
Connector
J/C
Splice Pack (Green)
Relays
Usage
INCLR PUMP Inner Cooler Pump (Option)
Electronic Level Control,
Compressor (Option)
ELC CMPRSR
5-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger’s Side
Automatic Occupant Sensor,
Passenger Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint
Power Subwoofer
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
Heated Steering Wheel
Front Passenger Heated Seat,
HTD/SEAT/XM S-Band™ Antenna
AIRBAG/IGN
HTD STR
RF
CNSTR/VENT Canister Vent Solenoid
DIFF PUMP Rear Differential Pump
5-126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Relays
Usage
RDO/ONSTAR Radio, OnStar®
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
INT LAMP
Interior Lamps
Left Turn Signal, Lane Departure
Warning (Option)
REAR/FOG
RUN/CRNK
SPARE
Rear Fog Lamps (Option)
Ignition 1
Spare
LT TRN/LDW
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
REAR/FOG
RIM
STOP LAMP Stop Lamp
Rear Fog Lamps (Option)
Rear Integration Module
Rear Integration Module, Rear
Parking Aid, Inside Rearview Mirror,
Column Lock Module, Power
Sounder, Active Front Steering
(AFS), Supervisory Control Module
Circuit
Breakers
WINDOW
MTRS
Usage
Power Window Motors Circuit
Breaker
RIM /RPA /
ISRVM /CLM
Diodes
Usage
UHBEC Run, CRNK Relay Coil,
Rear Fog Lamp Relay Coil
RUN/CRNK
TRUNK DIODE Trunk Release
S/ROOF
SPARE
STOP LAMPS Stop Lamps
Sun Roof Module (Option)
Spare
Joint
Connector
Usage
Splice Pack (Blue)
J/C
Right Turn Signal, Side Blind Zone
Alert (Option)
RT TRN/SZBA
Relays
DIFF PUMP
Usage
Rear Differential Pump (Option)
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
INT LAMP Interior Lamps
5-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant
charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label
located under the hood. See your dealer/retailer
for more information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
3.6L Engine
12.1 qt
13.4 qt
12.5 qt
2.6 qt
11.5 L
12.7 L
11.8 L
2.5 L
4.4L (V-Series) Engine
4.6L Engine
Intercooler System 4.4L (V-Series) Engine
Brake Fluid Capacities
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine
1.1 qt
1.0 L
6.0 qt
9.0 qt
5.7 L
8.5 L
7.6 L
66.2 L
4.4L (V-Series) Engine
4.6L Engine
8.0 qt
Fuel Tank
17.5 gal
5-128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities
Application
Transmission (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
6-Speed Automatic
English
Metric
6.7 qt
6.5 qt
6.3 L
6.2 L
6-Speed Automatic (V-Series)
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this
manual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
3.6L SIDI V6
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
V
D
A
Automatic
0.044 inches (1.11 mm)
0.040 inches (1.02 mm)
0.050 inches (1.27 mm)
4.4L DOHC V8 (V-Series)
4.6L DOHC V8
Automatic
Automatic
STS-V Engine Data
Engine
Horsepower
Torque
Displacement
Compression Ratio
469hp (350 kW)
@ 6400 rpm
439 lb ft (595 Nm)
@ 3800 rpm
4.4L V8 (V-Series)
4.4L
9.0:1
5-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your
dealer/retailer for details.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your dealer/retailer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your Own
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your
dealer/retailer do these jobs.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-5.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
To maintain the ride, handling, and performance of your
vehicle, it is important that the first tire rotation service
be performed when the vehicle has 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). Check tires for inflation pressures
recommended for your vehicle, rotate tires. See Tire
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
should be checked, when to check it, and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means
that service is required for your vehicle. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil life
system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service technicians who will perform this
work using genuine parts and reset the system.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to
reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
information on the Engine Oil Life System and
resetting the system.
on page 5-57. If tire rotation is recommended for your
vehicle, rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
✍ Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
✍ Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid
levels. If you have the 4.4L V8 supercharged engine,
check intercooler fluid level. Add fluid as needed.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, the following services, checks, and inspections
are required:
✍ Perform any needed additional services.
See “Additional Required Services” in this section.
✍ Inspect suspension and steering components.
See footnote (b).
✍ Visually check for any leaks or damage.
✍ Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
✍ Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
See footnote (k).
✍ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
See footnote (m).
✍ Inspect restraint system components.
See footnote (e).
✍ Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or
leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
page 5-23.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace passenger compartment
air filter. See footnote (g).
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
For all-wheel-drive vehicles used for
trailer towing: Change transfer case fluid.
•
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (j).
•
4.4L Supercharged Engine: Intercooler
system service (or every five years,
whichever occurs first). See footnote (l).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (n).
If using DOT-4 brake fluid, change brake
fluid at a regular maintenance service
every two years.
See footnote (i).
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all hinges
and latches, including those for the hood, rear
compartment, glove box door, and console door. More
frequent lubrication may be required when exposed
to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts
as needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure
test of the cooling system and pressure cap and
cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning
condenser is recommended at least once a year.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the
filter may require replacement more often.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
page 5-112 for more information.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as limousine service.
− Uses such as high performance operation.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(i) If using DOT-4 brake fluid only: Drain, flush, and refill
brake hydraulic system at a regular maintenance
service every two years. This service can be complex;
you should have your dealer/retailer perform this service.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
(j) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
(l) Drain, flush, and refill intercooler system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
Engine Oil Level Check
(m) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
At Least Once a Month
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-25.
Tire Inflation Check
Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
page 5-66. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
Intercooler Coolant Level Check
(4.4L Supercharged Engine)
Check the coolant level and add DEX-COOL® coolant
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation is recommended if your vehicle has the
same size tires at all four wheel positions and may be
required for high mileage highway drivers prior to
the Engine Oil Life System service notification.
Check the tires for wear and, if necessary, rotate the
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper
fluid if necessary. See Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-40.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
on page 2-35.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
3. With the engine off and without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer for service.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front of your
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to
apply the regular brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Engine Cooling water and use only DEX-COOL®
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
System
page 5-25.
Intercooler
System
50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and use only
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
(4.4L V8
Supercharged DEX-COOL® Coolant.
engine)
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard can be identified as
synthetic, and should also be
identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified
for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. However, not all synthetic
API oils with the starburst symbol
will meet this GM standard.
Look for and use only oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M. For the
proper viscosity, see Engine Oil
on page 5-18.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Engine Oil
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
Power Steering
System
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Automatic
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Key Lock
Cylinders
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood and
Door Hinges
Rear Axle
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Front Axle
(All-Wheel
Drive)
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Transfer Case Manual Transmission Fluid
(All-Wheel
Drive)
(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,
in Canada 88861801).
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Element
3.6L and 4.6L Engines
4.4L (V-Series) Engine
Engine Oil Filter
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part Number
25735595 or 25798271
15813300
A2944C
A3078C
3.6L Engine
25177917
890175271
89017342
88957450
PF2129
PF261
PF61
4.4L (V-Series) Engine
4.6L Engine
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs
CF13C
3.6L Engine
12597464
12592619
12571535
41-990
41-991
41-987
4.4L (V-Series) Engine
4.6L Engine
Windshield Wiper Blade
Driver’s Side – 22 inches (56.5 cm)
88958361
88958359
—
—
Passenger’s Side – 21 inches (53.0 cm)
1
Notice: If your vehicle is an STS-V model, the engine uses a special oil filter. The use of any other engine
oil filter could lead to filter failure and result in severe engine damage. Damage caused by use of the
wrong engine oil filter would not be covered by your new vehicle warranty.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6L V8 Engine
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Assistance and
Information
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP THREE (United States Owners): Both General
Motors and your dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle.
However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after
following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,
you should file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
United States, contact the Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center, 24 hours a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006.
In Canada, contact the Canadian Cadillac Customer
Communication Centre by calling 1-888-446-2000.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
program. General Motors of Canada Limited has
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims.
The program provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may
include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time you file your
complaint to the final decision, should be completed
in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial
program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively you may call
the General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or
you may write to the Mediation/Arbitration Program at the
following address. Your inquiry should be accompanied
by your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1–163–005
In the event that you do not feel your concerns have
been addressed after the following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two. General Motors of
Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its
participation in a no-charge mediation/Arbitration
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe
to E-News and use tools and forms with
greater ease.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
Customer Assistance Offices
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to
write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should be addressed to:
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
United States — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
www.Cadillac.com
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Roadside Service
In the United States or Canada, call 1-800-882-1112.
Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only, call 1-888-889-2438.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Cadillac vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Cadillac Roadside
Service® program.
Who Is Covered?
Roadside Service coverage is for the vehicle operator,
regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person driving
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is not
eligible for coverage.
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of
eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required
for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up
to a maximum coverage of $100. These services are
provided at a nominal charge if the vehicle is no longer
within the Powertrain warranty.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner
Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your
Cadillac Powertrain Warranty — 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km).
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
following situations:
• Trip Routing Service: Upon request, Cadillac
Roadside Service will send you detailed, computer
personalized maps, highlighting your choice of either
the most direct route or the most scenic route to your
destination, anywhere in North America, along with
helpful travel information pertaining to your trip.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle
to get to the nearest service station (approximately
$5 in Canada). In Canada, for safety reasons,
propane and other alternative fuels will not be
provided through this service.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. In Canada, trip routing requests will
be limited to six per calendar year.
• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your
vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if you
have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensure
security, the driver must present personal
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental
expenses may be reimbursed during the 60 months/
100,000 miles (160 000 km) warranty period. Items
covered are hotel, meals, and rental car.
identification before lock-out service is provided.
In Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty
service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling crash.
Winch-out assistance is provided when the vehicle is
mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There may be
times when Roadside Service cannot provide timely
assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you will be
reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Cadillac Roadside Service®.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or reimbursement to an
owner or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims
become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
charge if the vehicle does not start.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Location of the vehicle
Cadillac Technician Roadside Service
(U.S. only)
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner in the United States with the advantage of
contacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available,
a Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide
on-site service.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of
the vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
A dealer technician will travel to your location within a
30 mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.
If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your
car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership.
Each technician travels with a specially equipped
service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac
parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
Specifically excluded from Roadside Service coverage
are towing or services for vehicles operated on a
non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound towing
caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State,
Provincial or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Roadside Service is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to make any changes or discontinue the
Roadside Service program at any time without
notification.
Calling for Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Service
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Shuttle Service
Courtesy Transportation
Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip
shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km)
from the dealership.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
agreement and meet state, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the dealer’s shuttle
service, the expense must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount
allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement
of fuel or other transportation costs.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. If you obtain a rental vehicle on your own, please
see your dealer for the maximum number of days
allowed and the allowance per rental day. Rental
reimbursement must be supported by original receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known.
Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not
covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
These are made by companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for your vehicle. As a
result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are
not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not
covered by that warranty.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice
to assure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle
Warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians
and state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection
to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine
GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not
pay the full cost.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer/retailer or
a private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) immediately, in addition
to notifying General Motors.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation. If it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000, or write:
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
You can obtain information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Service Bulletins
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle.
Some modules may also store data about how you
operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or
average speed. These modules may also retain the
owner’s personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets,
seat positions, and temperature settings.
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data
with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar® and you subscribe to the
OnStar® services, please refer to the OnStar® Terms
and Conditions for information on data collection
this manual for more information.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System (cont.)
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraints (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine (cont.)
Fuel (cont.)
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-59
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mirrors (cont.)
M
Magnetic Ride Control ....................................... 4-8
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-21
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service (cont.)
S
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield (cont.)
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-57
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
